Advanced User Guide

CT2-D027-B © CANON INC. 2020

Contents

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Instruction Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Quick Start Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
About This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Compatible Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Handling Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Preparation and Basic Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Inserting/Removing Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Inserting/Removing Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using the Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Turning on the Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Attaching/Detaching Lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Basic Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Setting the Screen Display Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Menu Operations and Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Quick Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Touch-Screen Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Viewing the Screen as You Shoot (Live View Shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Shooting Selfies (Self Portrait). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Basic Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Special Scene Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Portrait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Smooth Skin Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Group Photo Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
 Landscape Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Close-up Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Sports Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Kids Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Food Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Candlelight Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Night Portrait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Handheld Night Scene Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
HDR Backlight Control Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Creative Filters Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Creative Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Program AE Mode (P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Shutter-Priority AE Mode (Tv). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Aperture-Priority AE Mode (Av). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Manual Exposure Mode (M). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Long (Bulb) Exposures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Mirror Lockup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
AF, Drive, and Exposure Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
AF Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Selecting the AF Area and AF Point (Viewfinder Shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Selecting the AF Methods (Live View Shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Manual Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Drive Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Using the Self-Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Remote Control Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Metering Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Exposure Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Exposure Lock (AE Lock). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Flash Photography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Shooting With the Built-in Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Flash Function Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Shooting With External Flash Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
 Wireless Flash Photography Using Optical Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Easy Wireless Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Custom Wireless Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Shooting and Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Still Photo Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting (Viewfinder Shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting (Live View Shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Still Image Aspect Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Image Review Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Shutter Release Without Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Lens Aberration Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Exposure Compensation/AEB Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
ISO Speed Settings (Still Photos). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Auto Lighting Optimizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Highlight Tone Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Metering Timer (Live View Shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
White Balance Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
White Balance Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Color Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Picture Style Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Picture Style Customization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Picture Style Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Noise Reduction Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Appending Dust Delete Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Anti-Flicker Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Continuous AF (Live View Shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Lens Electronic MF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
AF-Assist Beam Firing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
General Still Photo Shooting Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Tab Menus: Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
 Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
HDR Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Creative Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Movie Recording Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Digital Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Movie Self-Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Sound Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Movie Digital IS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Time-Lapse Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Video Snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Movie Servo AF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Other Menu Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
General Movie Recording Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Tab Menus: Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Image Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Magnified Image Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Movie Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Editing a Movie's First and Last Scenes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Frame Extraction from 4K Movies or 4K Time-Lapse Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Playback on a TV Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Protecting Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Rotating Still Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Changing Movie Orientation Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Erasing Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Print Ordering (DPOF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Photobook Set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Creative Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
RAW Image Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Creative Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Quick Control RAW Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Red-Eye Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
 Creating Albums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Cropping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Resizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Rating Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Slide Show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Setting Image Search Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Browsing Images with the Main Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Histogram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
AF Point Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Resuming from Previous Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
HDMI HDR Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Wireless Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Tab Menus: Wireless Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Connecting to a Smartphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Sending Images to a Web Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Registering Multiple Connection Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Wi-Fi Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Bluetooth Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Nickname. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
GPS Device Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Airplane Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings to Default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
View Info Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Virtual Keyboard Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Responding to Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Wireless Communication Function Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
 Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Checking Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Wireless Communication Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Tab Menus: Set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Selecting a Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
File Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Auto Rotate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Adding Orientation Information to Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Formatting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Auto Power Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Display Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Screen Off/On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Date/Time/Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Video System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Touch Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Beeps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Battery Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Sensor Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Viewfinder Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
INFO Button Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Grid Display When Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Shutter Button Function for Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Switching AF Point Selection and AE Lock Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
HDMI Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Multi-Function Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Custom Functions (C.Fn). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Clearing Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Copyright Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Other Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
 Tab Menus: My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Registering My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Importing Images to a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Household Power Outlet Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
System Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
ISO Speed in Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Information Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
AF Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Compatible Lenses and Autofocusing (Viewfinder Shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Trademarks and Licensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Introduction

Before starting to shoot, be sure to read the following

To avoid shooting problems and accidents, first read the Safety Instructions and Handling
Precautions. Also read this Advanced User Guide carefully to ensure that you use the
camera correctly.

Take some test shots, and understand about product liability

After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded. If
the camera or memory card is faulty and the images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a
computer, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.

Copyrights

Copyright laws in some countries prohibit the unauthorized use of images recorded with the
camera (or music/images with music transferred to the memory card) for purposes other
than personal enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc.
may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.

• Package Contents
• Instruction Manuals
• Quick Start Guide
• About This Guide
• Compatible Cards
• Safety Instructions
• Handling Precautions
• Part Names
• Software

9
Package Contents

Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package. If anything is
missing, contact your dealer.

Camera
(with eyecup and body cap)

Battery Pack LP-E17

(with protective cover)

Battery Charger LC-E17/LC-E17E*

Strap

* Battery Charger LC-E17 or LC-E17E is provided. (The LC-E17E comes with a power cord.)

The camera does not come with a memory card ( ), interface cable, or HDMI cable.
If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
Be careful not to lose any of these items.

Caution

When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon website
( ).
The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF files) are for lenses sold individually. Note that
when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the accessories included with the lens may
not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.

10
Instruction Manuals

The Instruction Manual included with the camera provides basic instructions for the
camera and Wi-Fi functions.

Advanced User Guide

Complete instructions are provided in this Advanced User Guide.
For the latest Advanced User Guide, refer to the following website.
https://cam.start.canon/C002/

Lens/Software Instruction Manual

Download from the following website.
https://cam.start.canon/

Note

Select [ : Manual/software URL] to display the QR code on the camera screen.

11
Quick Start Guide

1. Insert the battery ( ).

Upon purchase, charge the battery to start using ( ).

2. Insert the card ( ).

With the card's label facing toward the back of the camera, insert it into
the card slot.

12
3. Attach the lens ( ).
White index

Red index

Align the mount indexes on the lens and camera (red or white) to attach
the lens.

4. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >( ).

13
5. Set the power switch to < >, then set the Mode dial to
< >( , ).

All the necessary camera settings will be set automatically.

6. Flip out the screen ( ).

When the [Date/Time/Zone] setting screen is displayed, see page Date/

Time/Zone.

7. Focus on the subject ( ).

Look through the viewfinder and center the subject on the screen.
Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus on the
subject.
If < > blinks in the viewfinder, manually raise the built-in flash.

14
 8. Take the picture ( ).

Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

9. Review the picture.

The image just captured will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
screen ( ).
To display the image again, press the < > button ( ).

To shoot while looking at the screen, see Viewing the Screen as You Shoot (Live View
Shooting).

15
About This Guide

Icons in This Guide

Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and Sample Photos

Icons in This Guide

< > Indicates the Main dial.

< > Indicates the Quick control dial.

< >< >
Indicates the direction to press the Quick control dial.
< >< >
< > Indicates the Set button.

< > Indicates the Quick Control button.

Indicates the duration (in * seconds) of the operation for the button
* you pressed, as timed after you release the button.

In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera's buttons and
displayed on the screen are also used in this manual when discussing relevant
operations and functionality.

to the right of page titles indicates functions only available in

Creative Zone modes (< >, < >, < >, or < >) or for
manual exposure movie recording.
Links to pages with related topics.

Warning to prevent shooting problems.

Supplemental information.

Tips or advice for better shooting.

Troubleshooting advice.

16
Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and
Sample Photos

Before following any instructions, make sure the power switch is set to < > and the
Multi-function lock feature is off ( , ).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to their defaults.
Screen shots in this guide show the default menu settings for NTSC regions (North
America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, etc.) as an example. Default menu settings for
Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc. will be for PAL.
Illustrations in this guide show the camera with the EF-S18-55mm lens attached as an
example.
The sample photos displayed on the camera and used in this guide are for instructional
purposes only.

17
Compatible Cards

The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of capacity. If the card is new
or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the
card with this camera ( ).

SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards

UHS-I cards supported.

Cards That Can Record Movies

When recording movies, use a high-capacity card with ample performance (fast enough
writing and reading speeds) for the movie recording size. For details, see Cards That Can
Record Movies.

In this guide, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory cards,

and SDXC memory cards.
* A card is not included. Please purchase it separately.

18
Safety Instructions

Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.

Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the product or others.

WARNING: Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.

Keep the product out of the reach of young children.

A strap wrapped around a person's neck may result in strangulation.
The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if swallowed. If
swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
The battery is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
Use only power sources specified in this instruction manual for use with the product.
Do not disassemble or modify the product.
Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as the presence of
smoke or a strange smell.
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner to clean the
product.
Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.
Do not use the product where flammable gases may be present.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
Do not leave a lens or a camera/camcorder with a lens attached, exposed without the
lens cap attached.
The lens may concentrate the light and cause fire.
For products featuring a viewfinder, do not look through the viewfinder at strong light
sources such as the sun on a bright day or lasers and other strong artificial light
sources.
This may harm your vision.
Do not touch the product connected to a power outlet during lightning storms.
This may cause electric shock.
Observe the following instructions when using commercially available batteries or
provided battery packs.
• Use batteries/battery packs only with their specified product.
• Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to fire.
• Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery chargers.
• Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins
or other metal objects.
• Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
• When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals with tape or other
means.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or clothing, flush the
exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of eye contact, flush thoroughly with
copious amounts of clean running water and seek immediate medical assistance.

19
 Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger.
• Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a
dry cloth.
• Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
• Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet.
• Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact
with metallic pins or other metal objects.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break or modify the
power cord.
Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or shortly after use when
the product is still warm in temperature.
Do not unplug the product by pulling the power cord.
Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods of time.
Do not charge batteries/battery packs at temperatures outside the range of 5 – 40 °C
(41 – 104 °F).
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin for extended
periods of time during use.
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness and blistering,
even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or similar equipment is
recommended when using the product in hot places and for people with circulation problems
or less sensitive skin.
Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is forbidden.
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the effect of electromagnetic
waves and even result in accidents.

20
 CAUTION: Denotes the risk of injury.

Do not fire the flash near the eyes.

It may hurt the eyes.
Do not look at the screen or through the viewfinder for prolonged periods of time.
This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using the
product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use.
Flash emits high temperatures when fired. Keep fingers, any other part of your body,
and objects away from the flash unit while taking pictures.
This may cause burns or malfunction of the flash.
Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury when touched.
Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product attached
on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the product or
expose the product to strong impacts.
Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
Only mount the product on a tripod that is sufficiently sturdy.
Do not carry the product when it is mounted on a tripod.
This may cause injury or may result in an accident.
Do not touch any parts inside the product.
This may cause injury.
If any abnormal skin reaction or irritation occurs during or following the use of this
product, refrain from further use and get medical advice/attention.

21
Handling Precautions

Camera care

This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock.

The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If the camera gets wet,
contact a Canon Service Center immediately. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry and
clean cloth. If the camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a clean, well-wrung
wet cloth.
Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet
or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the camera near anything emitting strong
radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong magnetic fields can cause camera
malfunction or destroy image data.
Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct sunlight. High
temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to disassemble the
camera yourself.
Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
Use only a commercially available blower to blow away dust when it adheres to the lens,
viewfinder, mirror, focusing screen, etc. Do not use cleaners that contain organic
solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the
nearest Canon Service Center.
Do not touch the camera's electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the
contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera malfunction.
If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room, condensation may
form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent condensation, first put the camera in
a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of
the bag.
If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid damaging
the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and battery from the
camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before using the camera.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store the
camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the camera is in storage,
press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is still
working.
Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and corrosion
such as in a chemical lab.
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions before
using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot
such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera checked by your nearest Canon
Service Center or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.
The camera may become hot after repeated continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or
movie shooting over an extended period. This is not a malfunction.
If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting may occur.

22
Screen

Although the screen is manufactured with very high precision technology with over
99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may be dead, and there may also
be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is not a malfunction. They do not affect the
images recorded.
If the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur where you see
remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only temporary and will disappear
when the camera is left unused for a few days.
The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or may look black in
high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.

Cards

To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:

Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force, physical shock,
or vibration.
Do not touch the card's electronic contacts with your fingers or anything metallic.
Do not affix any stickers, etc. on the card.
Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field, such as a
television, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone to having static electricity.
Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
Store the card in a case.
Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

Smudges on the image sensor

Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant from the camera's
internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If smudges are visible on images, have
the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center.

Lens

After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens with the rear end up and
attach the rear lens cap to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts
(1).

23
Part Names

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(20) (21)
(19)
(6) (7)

(18) (22)
(17)
(23)
(16)
(15) (8)
(14)
(24)
(13)
(25) (26) (27) (28) (29)(30)
(12)
(11 )
(10)
(9)

(31)

24
(1) Mode dial
(2) Built-in flash/AF-assist beam emitter
(3) Microphone
(4) EF lens mount index
(5) EF-S lens mount index
(6) < > Focal plane mark
(7) Speaker
(8) Terminal cover
(9) Lens release button
(10) Lens lock pin
(11) Lens mount
(12) Contacts
(13) Mirror
(14) Grip
(15) Red-eye reduction/Self-timer lamp
(16) < > AF area/AF method selection button
(17) Shutter button
(18) < > Main dial
(19) < > Display button
(20) < > ISO speed setting button
(21) < > Remote control terminal
(22) < > Digital terminal
(23) < > HDMI mini OUT terminal
(24) < > External microphone IN terminal
(25) Serial number
(26) Tripod socket
(27) Depth-of-field preview button
(28) Battery compartment cover
(29) Battery compartment cover lock
(30) DC cord hole
(31) Body cap

25
 (4) (6)
(2) (3) (5) (7)

(1)
(1) (8) (9)

(16) (17)
(15)
(14)
(13)
(12) (18)

(19)

(20) (23)
(21) (24)
(25)
(22)
(10) (26)
(11 )

26
(1) Strap mount
(2) Hot shoe
(3) Flash sync contacts
(4) Dioptric adjustment knob
(5) < > Live View shooting/Movie shooting button
Switches from viewfinder display to Live View display. Recording is possible when
the power switch is set to < >.
(6) < > AF start button
(7) Power switch
(8) < > AF point selection/< > Magnify button
(9) < > AE lock/FE lock/< > Index/Reduce button
(10) Card slot cover
(11) Access lamp
(12) Screen
(13) Viewfinder eyepiece
(14) < > Info button
(15) < > Menu button
(16) Eyecup
(17) Card slot
(18) < > Quick Control button
(19) < / > Up/White balance selection button
(20) < / / > Left/Self-timer/Drive mode selection button
(21) < / > Down/Picture Style selection button
(22) < > Playback button
(23) < / > Right/AF operation selection button
(24) < > Setting button
(25) < > Quick control dial
(26) < > Erase/< > Lock button

27
Viewfinder information display
(7)
(1)
(2) (8)

(3) (9)

(4) (10)

(5) (11)

(6)

(1) Focusing screen

(2) Aspect ratio line (1:1)
(3) Grid
(4) Spot metering circle
(5) Large Zone AF frame
(6) Electronic level
(7) < > AF point
(8) Aspect ratio line (16:9)
(9) Area AF frame
(10) Aspect ratio line (4:3)
(11) < > Flicker detection
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.

28
(1) (9)
(2)
(3) (10)
(4) (11)

(5) (12)
(6) (13)
(7) (14)
(8) (15)

29
(1) Aperture value
(2) AF point selection
( , , )
(3) Shutter speed
Bulb ( )
FE lock ( )
Busy/Charging the built-in flash ( )
Multi-function lock warning ( )
No card warning ( )
Card full warning ( )
Card error warning ( )
Error codes ( )
AI Bounce mode active ( )
(4) < > Flash exposure compensation
(5) < > Warning icon
(6) < > AE lock
AEB in progress
(7) < > Warning to use flash (blinking)
Flash ready (on)
FE lock out of range warning (blinking)
(8) < > FE lock
FEB in progress
< > High-speed sync
(9) < > ISO speed
(10) Maximum burst
(11) < > Focus indicator
(12) ISO speed
(13) < > Highlight tone priority
(14) Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount
AEB range
Red-eye reduction lamp ON
(15) < > Exposure compensation

30
Mode dial
The Mode Dial includes the Basic Zone modes and Creative Zone modes.

(1) Basic Zone

All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to suit the subject or
scene for shooting.

: Scene Intelligent Auto ( )

: Special scene ( )

Portrait Kids

Smooth skin Food

Group Photo Candlelight

Landscape Night Portrait

Close-up Handheld Night Scene

Sports HDR Backlight Control

: Creative filters ( )

Grainy B/W Miniature effect

Soft focus HDR art standard

Fish-eye effect HDR art vivid
Water painting effect HDR art bold
Toy camera effect HDR art embossed

31
(2) Creative Zone

These modes give you more control for shooting various subjects as desired.

Program AE (P)

Shutter priority AE (Tv)

Aperture priority AE (Av)

Manual exposure (M)

Battery Charger LC-E17

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17 ( ).

(1) Power plug

(2) Charge lamp
(3) Full-charge lamp
(4) Battery pack slot

32
Battery Charger LC-E17E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17 ( ).

(1) Power cord socket

(2) Charge lamp
(3) Full-charge lamp
(4) Battery pack slot
(5) Power cord

33
 Attaching the Strap

Pass the end of the strap through the camera's strap mount eyelet from the bottom. Then
pass it through the strap's buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take up any
slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle.

34
Software

Software Overview

Downloading and Installing EOS Software or Other Dedicated Software

Downloading the Software Instruction Manual

Software Overview

This section summarizes software used with EOS cameras. Note that downloading and
installing the software requires an internet connection. The software cannot be downloaded
or installed in environments without an internet connection.

EOS Utility

Enables you to transfer your captured still photos and movies from the camera to a
connected computer, set various camera settings from the computer, and shoot remotely
from the computer. Also, you can copy background music tracks, such as EOS Sample
Music*, to the card.
* You can use the background music as the soundtrack for a video snapshot album, movie, or slide
show played back with your camera.

Digital Photo Professional

Software recommended for users who shoot RAW images. Enables image viewing, editing,
printing, and more.

Picture Style Editor

Enables you to edit existing Picture Styles or create and save original Picture Style files.
This software is for users who are familiar with image processing.

35
 Downloading and Installing EOS Software or Other
Dedicated Software

Always install the latest version of the software.

Update any previous versions that are installed by overwriting them with the latest version.

Caution

Do not connect the camera to a computer before you install the software. The
software will not be installed correctly.
The software cannot be installed unless the computer is connected to the internet.
Previous versions cannot display images from this camera correctly. Also,
processing RAW images from this camera is not possible.

36
1. Download the software.

Connect to the internet from a computer and access the following

Canon website.
https://cam.start.canon/

Enter the serial number on the bottom of the camera, then download
the software.

Decompress it on the computer.

For Windows
Click the displayed installer file to start the installer.

For macOS
A dmg file will be created and displayed. Follow the steps below to
startup the installer.

1.Double-click the dmg file.

• A drive icon and installer file will appear on the desktop.

If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive
icon to display it.

2.Double-click the installer file.

• The installer starts.

2. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.

37
 Downloading the Software Instruction Manual

Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon website to
your computer.

Software Instruction Manual download site

https://cam.start.canon/

38
Preparation and Basic Operations

This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting and the basic camera
operations.

• Charging the Battery

• Inserting/Removing Batteries
• Inserting/Removing Cards
• Using the Screen
• Turning on the Power
• Attaching/Detaching Lenses
• Basic Operations
• Setting the Screen Display Level
• Menu Operations and Settings
• Quick Control
• Touch-Screen Operation
• Viewing the Screen as You Shoot (Live View Shooting)
• Shooting Selfies (Self Portrait)

39
Charging the Battery

1. Detach the protective cover provided with the battery.

2. Fully insert the battery into the charger.

Do the opposite to remove the battery.

40
3. Recharge the battery.

LC-E17

As shown by the arrow, flip out the battery charger's prongs and insert
the prongs into a power outlet.

LC-E17E

Connect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into a power
outlet.

Charging starts automatically and the charge lamp (1) lights up in

orange.
When the battery is fully charged, the full-charge lamp (2) will light up in
green.
It takes approx. 2 hr. to fully charge a completely exhausted
battery at room temperature (23°C/73°F).
The time required to charge the battery will vary greatly depending on
the ambient temperature and the battery's remaining capacity.
For safety reasons, charging in low temperatures (5–10°C/41–50°F)
will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).

41
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.

Charge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.

Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used.

After charging the battery, remove it and disconnect the charger from the power
outlet.

When not using the camera, remove the battery.

If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount of power
current will keep being released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter battery life.
Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing the battery when it is fully
charged may lower the battery performance.

The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz power source.
If necessary, attach a commercially available plug adapter for the respective country or
region. Do not attach any portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so
may damage the battery charger.

If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having been fully charged,
the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery's recharge performance ( ) and purchase a new battery.

Caution

After disconnecting the charger's power plug, do not touch the prongs for approx. 5
sec.
The provided charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E17.

42
Inserting/Removing Batteries

Insertion

Removal

Insert a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17 into the camera.

Viewfinder brightness increases when a battery is inserted and decreases after
removal. Without a battery, viewfinder display is blurry and focusing is not possible.

Insertion

1. Slide the battery compartment cover lock and open the cover.

2. Insert the battery.

Insert the end with the electrical contacts.

Insert the battery until it locks in place.

43
 3. Close the cover.

Press the cover until it snaps shut.

Caution

You cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E17.

44
Removal

1. Open the cover and remove the battery.

Press the battery lock lever as shown by the arrow and remove the
battery.
To prevent short-circuits, always attach the included protective cover
( ) to the battery.

45
Inserting/Removing Cards

Insertion

Formatting the Card

Removal

The captured images are recorded onto the card.

Insertion

1. Slide the cover to open it.

2. Insert the card.

As shown by the illustration, face the card's label side toward you and
insert it until it clicks in place.

Caution
Make sure the card's write-protect switch (1) is set upward to
enable writing and erasing.

46
 3. Close the cover.

Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.

Formatting the Card

If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer,
format the card with this camera ( ).

47
Removal

1. Open the cover.

Set the power switch to < >.

Check that the access lamp (1) is off, then open the cover.
If [Saving...] is displayed on the screen, close the cover.

2. Remove the card.

Gently push in the card, then let it go to eject.

Pull the card straight out, then close the cover.

48
 Note

The number of available shots varies depending on the remaining capacity of the
card, the settings of image quality, ISO speed, etc.
Setting [ : Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent you from
forgetting to insert a card ( ).

Caution

When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being
written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred. Do
not open the card slot cover during this time. To avoid corrupting image data
or damaging cards or the camera, never do any of the following while the
access lamp is lit or blinking.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or striking the camera.
• Unplugging or plugging in a power cord
(when using optional Household Power Outlet Accessory).
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start from
0001 ( ).
If a card-related error message is displayed on the screen, remove and reinsert the
card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the images and
then format the card with the camera ( ). The card may then return to normal.
Do not touch the card's contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do not expose
the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the contacts, contact failure
may result.
Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.)

49
Using the Screen

You can change the direction and angle of the screen.

1. Flip out the screen.

2. Rotate the screen.

When the screen is out, you can tilt it up or down or rotate it to face the
subject.
Indicated angles are only approximate.

3. Face it toward you.

Normally, use the camera with the screen facing you.

50
 Caution

Avoid forcing the screen into position as you rotate it, which puts undue pressure
on the hinge.
When a cable is connected to a camera terminal, the rotation angle range of the
flipped-out screen will be limited.

Note

Keep the screen closed and facing the camera body when the camera is not in use.

51
Turning on the Power

Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone

Changing the Interface Language

Automatic Sensor Cleaning

Battery Level Indicator

< >
The camera turns on. You can record movies ( ).

< >
The camera turns on. You can shoot still photos.

< >
The camera is turned off and does not function. Set the power switch to this position
when not using the camera.

Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone

If you turn on the camera and the [Date/Time/Zone] setting screen appears, see Date/Time/
Zone to set the date, time, and time zone.

52
 Changing the Interface Language

To change the interface language, see Language.

Automatic Sensor Cleaning

Whenever the power switch is set to < > or < >, the sensor is cleaned
automatically (which may make a faint sound). During the sensor cleaning, the screen
will display [ ].
If you repeatedly turn the power switch to < > or < > within a short time
period, the [ ] icon may not be displayed, but this does not indicate the camera is
malfunctioning.

Note

If you set the power switch to < > while an image is being recorded to the
card, [Saving...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the recording
finishes.

53
 Battery Level Indicator

When the power switch is set to < >, the battery level will be indicated.

Battery level is sufficient.

Battery level is low, but the camera can still be used.

Battery will be exhausted soon (blinks).

Charge the battery.

Caution

Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:

• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens's Image Stabilizer.
• Using the Wi-Fi function or Bluetooth function.
• Using the screen frequently.
Fewer shots may be available under certain shooting conditions.
The lens operation is powered by the camera's battery. Certain lenses may exhaust
the battery faster than others.
In low ambient temperatures, shooting may not be possible even with a sufficient
battery level.

Note

See [ : Battery info.] to check the battery status ( ).

54
Attaching/Detaching Lenses

Attaching a Lens

Detaching a Lens

The camera can be used with all Canon EF and EF-S lenses. The camera cannot be used
with RF or EF-M lenses.

Attaching a Lens

1. Remove the caps.

Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.

55
2. Attach the lens.
White index

Red index

Align the white or red mount index on the lens with the corresponding
mount index on the camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow
until it clicks into place.

3. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >.

< > stands for autofocus.

< > stands for manual focus. Autofocus will not operate.

4. Remove the front lens cap.

56
 Detaching a Lens

1. While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the
arrow.

Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.

Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens.

Caution

Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of vision.
When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera's power switch to < >.
If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not touch
the rotating part.

Note

For instructions on how to use the lens, refer to the Lens Instruction Manual ( ).

Shooting angle of view

Because the image area is smaller than 35mm film format, the effective angle of view
corresponds to approx. 1.6 times the lens's indicated focal length.

(1) Image area (approx.) (22.3×14.8 mm/0.88×0.59 in.)

(2) 35mm film format (36×24 mm/1.42×0.94 in.)

57
Tips for avoiding smudges and dust

When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.

When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body cap to
the camera.
Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.

58
Basic Operations

Adjusting the Viewfinder

Holding the Camera

Shutter Button

Main Dial

Quick Control Dial

AF Start Button

LOCK Button

INFO Button

DISP Button

Adjusting the Viewfinder

Turn the dioptric adjustment knob left or right so that the AF points in the viewfinder look
sharp.
If the knob is difficult to turn, remove the eyecup.

Note

If the camera's dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder image,
using E series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (sold separately) is recommended.

59
 Holding the Camera

To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.

(1) Horizontal shooting

(2) Vertical shooting

1. With your right hand, hold the camera firmly by the camera grip.
2. With your left hand, support the lens from below.
3. Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Rest your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6. Hold the camera near your face and look through the viewfinder.

Note

To shoot while looking at the screen, see Viewing the Screen as You Shoot (Live
View Shooting).

60
 Shutter Button

The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can
further press the shutter button completely.

Pressing halfway

This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed
and aperture value.
The exposure value (shutter speed and aperture value) is displayed in the viewfinder for
approx. 4 sec. (metering timer/ ).

Pressing completely

This releases the shutter and takes the picture.

Preventing camera shake

“Camera shake” refers to movement of the camera in your hands at the moment of
exposure, which may cause overall blurriness in the picture. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold the camera still, as shown in Holding the Camera.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the shutter button
completely.

61
 Note

The camera will still pause before taking a picture if you press the shutter button
completely without pressing it halfway first, or if you press the shutter button
halfway and immediately press it completely.
Even during menu display or image playback, you can return to shooting standby
by pressing the shutter button halfway.

62
 Main Dial

(1) After pressing a button, turn the < > dial.

When you press a button such as < > or < >, the respective function remains
selectable for approx. 6 sec. ( ). During this time, you can turn the < > dial to adjust
the setting.
When the timer ends or if you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to
shooting standby.
Used for operations such as selection of the AF area, AF point, or AF operation, or the
ISO speed, drive mode, or Picture Style.

Note

Can be used even when the multi-function lock is engaged ( ).

63
(2) Turn only the < > dial.

Turn the < > dial while looking at the viewfinder.

Used for operations such as setting the shutter speed and aperture value.

64
 Quick Control Dial

(1) After pressing a button, turn the < > dial.

When you press a button such as < > or < >, the respective function remains
selectable for approx. 6 sec. ( ). During this time, you can turn the < > dial to adjust
the setting.
When the timer ends or if you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to
shooting standby.
Used for operations such as selection of the AF area, AF point, or AF operation, or the
ISO speed, drive mode, white balance, or Picture Style.

Note

Can be used even when the multi-function lock is engaged ( ).

65
(2) Turn only the < > dial.

Turn the < > dial while looking at the viewfinder.

Use this dial to set the exposure compensation amount, the aperture value setting for
manual exposures, etc.
Turning the Quick control dial is one way to choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Additionally, you can perform most of the operations that are
possible with the < > < > < >< > keys.

66
 AF Start Button

In still photo shooting, has the same effect as pressing the shutter button halfway in Creative
Zone modes ( ).
In movie recording as well, enables autofocusing in Creative Zone modes.

67
 LOCK Button

With [ : Multi function lock] configured ( ), you can press the < > button to
prevent unintended settings changes caused by accidentally operating the < > or < >
dials or touching the touch-screen panel.

Note

Attempting to use any locked camera controls after you have pressed the
< > button will cause < > to appear in the viewfinder and [ ] on the
Quick Control screen ( ).
By default, the < > dial will be locked when the multi-function lock switch is in the
lock position.

68
 INFO Button

Each press of the < > button changes the information shown.
The following sample screens are for still photos.
When the Quick Control screen is displayed, you can press the < > button and configure
shooting functions directly ( ).

In viewfinder shooting

Electronic level

Quick Control screen

69
In Live View shooting

70
 DISP Button

In viewfinder shooting, you can activate and deactivate screen display by pressing the
< > button.

71
Setting the Screen Display Level

Shooting Screen

Menu Display

Shooting Mode Guide

Feature Guide

You can set how information is displayed on the screen according to your preference.
Change the settings as necessary.

1. Display the main tabs.

Press the < > button to display the menu screen.

2. Select the [ ] tab.

Turn the < > dial or press < >< > on the < > dial to select
the [ ] tab, then press < >.

72
 Shooting Screen

You can select [Standard] or [Guided] (user-friendly) for the Quick Control screen in
viewfinder shooting. By default, it is set to [Guided].

1. Select [ : Shooting screen].

2. Select the display type.

73
Sample screens

< >: Guided

< >: Standard

< >: Guided

< >: Standard

Note

In Creative Zone modes, when [Guided] is set, only the functions particular to the
set shooting mode are displayed on the Quick Control screen. Note that items that
cannot be set from the Quick Control screen when [Guided] is selected can be set
via the menu screen ( ).

74
 Menu Display

You can select the display type from [Standard] or [Guided]. If you set [Guided], main tab
descriptions are provided when you press the < > button. If you set [Standard], you
proceed directly to the menu screen when you press the < > button. By default, it is
set to [Guided].

1. Select [ : Menu display].

2. Select the display type.

(1) Main tabs

75
 Note

The [ ] tab (My Menu tab) is not displayed when [Guided] is set. To set My Menu
( ), change the menu display level to [Standard].

76
 Shooting Mode Guide

A brief description of the shooting mode can be displayed when you switch shooting modes.
By default, it is set to [Enable].

1. Select [ : Mode guide].

2. Select [Enable].

3. Turn the Mode dial.

A description of the selected shooting mode will appear.

77
4. Press < >.

The rest of the description will appear.

To clear the mode guide, press < >.
In < > or < > mode, the shooting mode selection screen is
displayed.

78
 Feature Guide

A brief description of functions and items can be displayed when you use Quick Control or
menu settings. By default, it is set to [Enable].

1. Select [ : Feature guide].

2. Select [Enable].

79
Sample screens

Quick Control screen

Menu screen

(1) Feature guide

Note

To clear a description, either tap it or continue performing operations.

80
 Shooting tips

With [ : Shooting screen] set to [Guided] ( ), shooting tips are displayed if the camera
anticipates any of the following situations under the current camera settings. In Basic Zone
modes, shooting tips appear regardless of the [ : Shooting screen] setting.

You want to blur the background further (when you have set the lowest aperture value in
< > mode).
The image is likely to be overexposed.
The image is likely to be underexposed.
Camera shake is likely to occur (only in Basic Zone modes).

1. Tap the area within the frame.

The shooting tips will appear.

2. Check the shooting tips.

Long tips can be scrolled by tapping on the screen.

You can also scroll by turning the < > dial or pressing the < >
< > keys.

81
 3. Tap [ ].

Shooting tips will disappear, and the screen in step 1 will reappear.
You can also hide the shooting tips by pressing < >.

Caution

Shooting tips are not displayed when touch operations are disabled.

82
Menu Operations and Settings

Menu Screen

Menu Setting Procedure

Dimmed Menu Items

(1) < > button

(2) < > button
(3) Screen
(4) < > button
(5) < > button
(6) < > Quick control dial
(7) < > Main dial

83
 Menu Screen

The menu tabs and items displayed vary depending on the shooting mode.

Basic Zone

Movie recording

Creative Zone

(1) Secondary tabs

(2) Menu settings
(3) Menu items

84
 Menu Setting Procedure

When set to [ : Menu display: Guided]

1. Display the main tabs.

When you press the < > button, the main tabs (1) and a
description of the selected tab will appear.

2. Select a main tab.

Each time you turn the < > dial, the main tab (group of functions)
will switch.

You can also switch between main tabs by pressing the < > or
< > button.

3. Display the menu screen.

Press < > to display the menu screen.

To return to the main tab screen, press the < > button.

85
4. Select a secondary tab.

Turn the < > dial to select a secondary tab.

5. Select an item.

Turn the < > dial to select an item, then press < >.

6. Select an option.

Turn the < > dial to select an option.

The current setting is indicated in blue.

86
 7. Set an option.

Press < > to set it.

If you change the setting from the default, it will be indicated in blue
(available only for the menu items under the [ ] tab).

8. Exit the setting.

Press the < > button twice to exit the menu and return to
shooting standby.

Note

The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that the menu screen is
displayed.
Menu operations are also possible by tapping the menu screen or using the < >
< >< >< > keys.
To cancel the operation, press the < > button.

87
When set to [ : Menu display: Standard]

1. Display the menu screen.

Press the < > button to display the menu screen.

2. Select a tab.

Each time you press the < > or < > button, the main tab (1) will
switch.
Turn the < > dial to select a secondary tab.
After this, operations are the same as when set to [ : Menu display:
Guided]. See When [ : Menu display: Guided] is Set, starting with
step 5.
To exit the setting, press the < > button once.

88
 Dimmed Menu Items

Example: When [Highlight tone priority] has been set

Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The menu item is dimmed if another function setting is
overriding it.

You can see the overriding function by selecting the dimmed menu item and pressing
< >.
If you cancel the overriding function's setting, the dimmed menu item will become settable.

Caution

You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu items.

Note

With [Clear all camera settings] under [ : Clear settings], you can reset the
menu functions to the default settings ( ).

89
Quick Control

In Viewfinder Shooting

In Live View Shooting/Movie Recording

During Playback

You can directly select and set the settings displayed on the screen.

In Viewfinder Shooting

1. Press the < > button ( ).

90
2. Select a setting item.

Press the < >< >< >< > keys for selection.

Creative Zone

Press < >.

Some items can be set by turning the < > or < > dial without
pressing < >.

Basic Zone

Press < >.

Some items can be set by turning the < > or < > dial without
pressing < >.

91
3. Select an option.

Turn the < > or < > dial to adjust the setting. Some items are
set by pressing a button after this.
Press < > to return to the previous screen.

92
To access the corresponding setting screen from the Quick Control
screen, press the < > button, then adjust the setting by turning the
< > or < > dial.

If you have selected [ ], press the < > button to adjust the
setting. To exit the setting, press the < > button.

93
In Live View Shooting/Movie Recording

1. Press the < > button ( ).

2. Select a setting item.

Press the < >< > keys for selection.

3. Select an option.

Turn the < > or < > dial to adjust the setting. Some items are
set by pressing a button after this.

Press the < > button to return to the previous screen.

94
During Playback

1. Press the < > button.

2. Select a setting item.

Press the < >< > keys for selection.

3. Select an option.

Turn the < > or < > dial to adjust the setting. Some items are
set by pressing a button after this.

Configure items labeled with a [ ] icon on the bottom of the screen

by pressing < >.

To cancel this operation, press the < > button.

Press the < > button to return to the previous screen.

Caution

For image rotation, set [ : Auto rotate] to [On ] ( ). When [ : Auto rotate]
is set to [On ] or [Off], images will be tagged with your selected [ Rotate
stills] option but not rotated on the camera.

95
 Note

Pressing the < > button during index display will switch to single-image display
and show the Quick Control screen. Pressing the < > button again will return to
the index display.
For images from other cameras, available options may be restricted.

96
Touch-Screen Operation

Tapping

Dragging

Tapping

Sample screens (Quick Control)

Use your finger to tap (touch briefly and then remove your finger from) the screen.
For example, when you tap [ ], the Quick Control screen appears. By tapping [ ],
you can return to the preceding screen.

Note

If [ : Beep] is set to [Touch ], the beep will not sound for touch operations ( ).
Responsiveness to touch operations can be adjusted in [ : Touch control] ( ).

97
 Dragging

Sample screen (Menu screen)

Slide your finger while touching the screen.

98
Viewing the Screen as You Shoot (Live View
Shooting)

1. Display the Live View image.

Press the < > button.

Live View images are displayed nearly as bright as your shots.

2. Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

If < > blinks, manually raise the built-in flash.
You can also tap the screen to select the face or subject ( ).

99
3. Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely.

Press the < > button to exit Live View shooting.

100
 Shooting with the Touch Shutter

Just by tapping the screen, you can focus and take the picture automatically.

1. Enable the Touch Shutter.

Tap [ ] on the screen's bottom right. Each time you tap the icon, it
will toggle between [ ] and [ ].
[ ] (Touch Shutter: Enable)
The camera will focus on the spot you tap on, then the picture will be
taken.
[ ] (Touch Shutter: Disable)
You can tap on a spot to perform focusing on the spot. Press the
shutter button completely to take the picture.

2. Tap the screen to shoot.

Tap the face or subject on the screen. On the point you tap, the camera
will focus (Touch AF) with the AF method that was set ( ).
When [ ] is set, the AF point turns green when focus is achieved,
then the picture is taken automatically.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point turns orange and the picture
cannot be taken. Tap on the face or subject on the screen again.

101
 Caution

The camera shoots in single shooting mode regardless of the drive mode setting.
Tapping the screen focuses with [One-Shot AF] regardless of the AF operation
setting.
Tapping the screen in magnified view will not focus or take the picture.
Regardless of where you tap with [Fish-eye effect] set in < > mode, the camera
focuses using the AF point in the center of the screen.
Touch Shutter has no effect with [Miniature effect] set in < > mode.
If you shoot with [ : Review duration] set to [Hold], you can press the shutter
button halfway to take the next shot.

Note

In bulb exposures ( ), tap once to start exposure and again to stop the bulb
exposure. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.
The self-timer lamp ( ) does not blink when the screen is facing toward the front
of the camera in [Self Portrait] mode.

102
Shooting Selfies (Self Portrait)

The Self Portrait mode processes the image to suit human subjects. Before shooting, you
can also specify background blurring, brightness, and skin smoothing.

1. Face the screen toward the front of the camera.

2. Tap [ ] on the screen.

Tap [ ] on the screen to activate [Self Portrait] mode.

3. Set the Self Portrait settings.

Tap a function (1) to select it, then set the effect.

103
 4. Take the picture.

When using the Touch Shutter:

Tap [ ] (2) and set to [ ] (Touch Shutter: Enable) ( ).

Tap the spot where you want to focus, then take the picture.

When using the shutter button:

Press the shutter button halfway to focus, then press it completely to

take the picture.

Caution

After the camera achieves focus, do not change the distance between you and the
camera until the picture is taken.
Be careful not to drop the camera.
Flash photography is not possible. Try to prevent camera shake when shooting in
low-light conditions.

Note

The camera exits [Self Portrait] mode when you set the power switch to < >
or do any of the following operations.
• Tapping [ ] on the screen.
• Rotating the screen back to its original position.
• Pressing the < > button.
The self-timer lamp ( ) does not blink when the screen is facing toward the front
of the camera in [Self Portrait] mode.

104
Basic Zone

This chapter describes how to use the Basic Zone modes on the Mode dial for best results.
With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot, and the camera sets everything
automatically.

• Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

• Special Scene Mode
• Portrait Mode
• Smooth Skin Mode
• Group Photo Mode
• Landscape Mode
• Close-up Mode
• Sports Mode
• Kids Mode
• Food Mode
• Candlelight Mode
• Night Portrait Mode
• Handheld Night Scene Mode
• HDR Backlight Control Mode
• Creative Filters Mode

105
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Recomposing the Shots

Shooting Moving Subjects

Scene Icons

Adjusting Settings

Shooting with Effects Applied (Creative Assist)

< > is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene and sets the
optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus automatically on either the still or
moving subject by detecting the motion of the subject ( ).

1. Set the Mode dial to < >.

2. Press < >.

Read the message and select [OK].

106
3. Aim the camera at what you will shoot (the subject).

Essentially, the camera focuses on the closest subject.

In viewfinder shooting, you can assist with focusing by centering the
Area AF frame (1) over the subject.
In Live View shooting, when a frame (AF point) appears on the screen,
aim it over the subject.

107
4. Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

If < > blinks, manually raise the built-in flash.

In viewfinder shooting

When achieving focus, the AF point that has achieved focus will be
displayed. At the same time, the beeper will sound and the focus
indicator < > in the viewfinder will light up. In low light, the AF
point(s) will light up briefly in red.

Under low light, the AF-assist beam (continuous flash) fires

automatically as needed when the built-in flash is raised.

In Live View shooting

Once the subject is in focus, that AF point turns green and the camera
beeps.

The AF point in focus on a moving subject turns blue and tracks subject
movement.

108
 5. Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

The image just captured will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
screen.
To retract the built-in flash, push it down with your fingers.

Caution

Subject movement (whether subjects are still or moving) may not be detected
correctly for some subject or shooting conditions.

Note

The < > mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor, and
sunset scenes. If you do not obtain the desired color tones, change the mode to a
Creative Zone mode ( ) and select a Picture Style other than [ ], then shoot
again ( ).

Minimizing Blurred Photos

Be careful about camera shake in handheld shots. To avoid camera shake, consider
using a tripod. Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting equipment.
Attach the camera securely to the tripod.
Using a remote switch (sold separately, ) or a wireless remote control (sold
separately, ) is recommended.

109
FAQ

Focusing is not possible (indicated by a blinking < > in the viewfinder, in

viewfinder shooting, or by an orange AF point in Live View shooting).
Aim the AF point over an area with good contrast, then press the shutter button halfway
( ). If you are too close to the subject, move away and shoot again.

Multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously.

Focus has been achieved at all those points.

Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to < >, set it to < >.

The shutter speed display is blinking.

Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject due to camera
shake. Using a tripod, the built-in flash, or an external flash ( ) is recommended.

Pictures are too dark.

Raise the built-in flash in advance to enable automatic flash firing, in case subjects in
daytime shots are backlit, or when shooting under low light.

The built-in flash fired repeatedly when raised while shooting under low light.
To make autofocusing easier, the built-in flash may fire repeatedly when you press the
shutter button halfway ( ).

Pictures taken with flash are too bright.

Pictures may be bright (overexposed) if you shoot subjects at close range in flash
photography. Move away from the subject and shoot again.

The bottom part of pictures taken with flash is unnaturally dark.

Shooting subjects that are too close may make the shadow of the lens visible in your
shots. Move away from the subject and shoot again. If you are using a lens hood, try
removing it before shooting.

110
 Note

Note the following if you are not using the built-in flash.
Under low light where camera shake tends to occur, the viewfinder's shutter speed
display will blink. Hold the camera steady or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens,
you can reduce the blur caused by camera shake by setting the lens to the wide-
angle end.
When shooting portraits under low light, tell subjects to stay still until you have
finished shooting. Any movement as you shoot will make the person look blurry in
the picture.

Recomposing the Shots

Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right to include a
balanced background will result in a picture with better perspective.
Pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the focus on that
subject. Recompose the shot while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then
press the shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock.”

Note

In Live View shooting, the camera continues to focus on any faces initially detected
and focused on, even if you recompose the shot.

111
 Shooting Moving Subjects

Pressing the shutter button halfway tracks moving subjects to keep them in focus.
Keep the subject in the Area AF frame (in viewfinder shooting) or on the screen (in Live
View shooting) as you hold down the shutter button halfway, and at the decisive moment,
press the shutter button completely.

Scene Icons

The camera detects the scene type and sets everything automatically to suit the scene. In
Live View shooting, an icon representing the type of scene detected appears in the upper
left of the screen ( ).

112
 Adjusting Settings

In viewfinder shooting, you can adjust drive mode, built-in flash firing, and Creative Assist
settings by pressing the < > button.

In Live View shooting, you can adjust built-in flash firing, drive mode, image quality, Touch
Shutter, and Creative Assist settings by tapping icons.

113
Shooting with Effects Applied (Creative Assist)

1. Press the < > button.

In viewfinder shooting, use the < >< > keys to select [Creative
Assist].

Note

In viewfinder shooting, you can also press the < > button and
select [Creative Assist].

In Live View shooting, read the message and select [OK].

114
2. Select an effect.

Use the < > or < > dial to select an effect, then press < >.

3. Select the effect level and other details.

Turn the < > or < > dial to set it, then press < >.
To reset the setting, press the < > button, then select [OK].

115
Creative Assist effects

[ ] Preset
Select one of the preset effects.
Note that [Saturation], [Color tone 1], and [Color tone 2] are not available with [B&W].

[ ] Background blur
Adjust background blur. Choose higher values to make backgrounds sharper. To blur
the background, choose lower values. [Auto] adjusts background blurring to match the
brightness. Depending on lens brightness (f/number), some positions may not be
available.

[ ] Brightness
Adjust image brightness.

[ ] Contrast
Adjust contrast.

[ ] Saturation
Adjust the vividness of colors.

[ ] Color tone 1
Adjust amber/blue color tone.

[ ] Color tone 2
Adjust green/magenta color tone.

[ ] Monochrome
Set the toning effect for monochrome shooting.

Note

[Background blur] is not available when the flash is used.

These settings are reset when you switch shooting modes or set the power switch
to < >. To save the settings, set [ : Retain Creative Assist data] to
[Enable].

Saving effects

To save the current setting to the camera, press the < > button on the [Creative
Assist] setting screen, then select [OK]. Up to three presets can be saved as [USER*]. After
*
three have been saved, an existing [USER ] preset must be overwritten to save a new one.

116
Special Scene Mode

The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when you select a shooting
mode for your subject or scene.
*< > stands for Special Scene.

1. Set the Mode dial to < >.

2. Press < >.

117
 3. Select a shooting mode.

Turn the < > or < > dial to select the desired shooting mode,
then press < >.

Note

When [ : Mode guide] is set to [Disable], after step 1, press the < > button,
use the < >< > keys to select [Choose scene], turn the < > or < >
dial to select a shooting mode, then press < >.

118
Available Shooting Modes in <SCN> Mode

Shooting Mode

Portrait Kids

Smooth skin Food

Group Photo Candlelight

Landscape Night Portrait

Close-up Handheld Night Scene

Sports HDR Backlight Control

Note

Live View shooting is not available in [ ] mode.

119
Portrait Mode

The [ ] (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human subject stand out. It also
makes skin tones and hair look softer.

Shooting tips

Select the location where the distance between the subject and the background is
the farthest.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the more blurred the
background will look. The subject will also stand out better against an uncluttered dark
background.

Use a telephoto lens.

If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with the subject from the
waist up.

Focus on the face.

As you focus before shooting, make sure that an AF point is displayed on the face (in
viewfinder shooting), or that the AF point on the face is green (in Live View shooting).
When shooting close-ups of the face in Live View shooting, you can set [ : Eye
Detection AF] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject's eyes in focus.

Shoot continuously.
The default setting is [ ] (Low speed continuous). If you keep holding down the shutter
button, you can shoot continuously to capture changes in the subject's facial expression
and pose.

120
Smooth Skin Mode

Use [ ] (Smooth skin) mode to make skin look more attractive. Image processing makes
skin look smoother.

Shooting tips

Enable the camera to detect faces.

Frames are displayed around any main subjects detected for skin smoothing. For more
effective skin smoothing, you can move closer to or farther from the subject so that the
frame is displayed on the subject's face.

Focus on the face.

As you focus before shooting, make sure that an AF point is displayed on the face (in
viewfinder shooting), or that the AF point on the face is green (in Live View shooting).
When shooting close-ups of the face in Live View shooting, you can set [ : Eye
Detection AF] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject's eyes in focus.

Caution

Areas other than people's skin may be modified, depending on the shooting
conditions.

121
Group Photo Mode

Use the [ ] (Group Photo) mode to shoot group photos. You can take a picture in which
both the people in the front and people in the back are all in focus.

Shooting tips

Use a wide-angle lens.

When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to make it easy to get all the people in
the group in focus at once, from the front row to the back. Also, if you place a little
distance between the camera and the subjects (so that the subjects' entire bodies are in
the shot), the focus range increases in depth.

Take multiple shots of the group.

It is recommended to shoot multiple photos in case some people close their eyes.

Caution

The angle of view changes slightly, due to distortion correction.

Depending on the shooting conditions, focus may not be attained for everyone from
the front to the back of the image.

Note

Using a tripod is recommended when shooting indoors or under low light.

122
Landscape Mode

Use the [ ] (Landscape) mode for expansive scenery or to have everything in focus from
near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and sharp and crisp images.

Shooting tips

With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.

When using a zoom lens, set the lens to the wide-angle end to make the objects near
and far in focus. It also adds breadth to landscapes.

Keep the camera steady when shooting night scenes.

Using a tripod is recommended.

Caution

The built-in flash will not fire, even if it is raised when you shoot.
Speedlites will not fire either, if used.

123
Close-up Mode

When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the [ ] (Close-up) mode. To
make small things appear much larger, use a macro lens (sold separately).

Shooting tips

Use a simple background.

A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out better.

Move in as close as possible to the subject.

Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. The lens minimum focusing distance
is measured from the < > (focal plane) mark on the top of the camera to the subject.
Focusing is not possible if you are too close.

With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.

If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the subject look larger.

When [ ] blinks
Manually raise the built-in flash.

124
Sports Mode

Use the [ ] (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a running person or a
moving vehicle.

Shooting tips

Use a telephoto lens.

Use of a telephoto lens is recommended to enable shooting from a distance.

Track the subject with the Area AF frame.

In viewfinder shooting, aim the Area AF frame over the subject and press the shutter
button halfway to start focusing. During autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping
softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator < > will blink.
In Live View shooting, an Area AF frame appears after you press the shutter button
halfway. Once the subject is in focus, the AF point turns blue.

Shoot continuously.
The default setting is [ ] (High speed continuous). At the decisive moment, press the
shutter button completely to take the picture. To track the subject and capture changes
as it moves, keep holding down the shutter button to shoot continuously.

Caution

Under low light where camera shake tends to occur, the shutter speed value in the
lower left will blink. Hold the camera steady and shoot.
Using a flash will decrease the continuous shooting speed.

125
Kids Mode

To photograph the children running around, use the [ ] (Kids) mode. Skin tones will look
healthy.

126
Shooting tips

Track the subject with the Area AF frame.

In viewfinder shooting, aim the Area AF frame (1) over the subject and press the shutter
button halfway to start focusing. During autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping
softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator < > will blink.
In Live View shooting, an Area AF frame (2) appears after you press the shutter button
halfway. Once the subject is in focus, the AF point turns blue.

Shoot continuously.
The default setting is [ ] (High speed continuous). At the decisive moment, press the
shutter button completely to take the picture. To track the subject and capture changes
in facial expression and movement, keep holding down the shutter button to shoot
continuously.

When [ ] blinks
Manually raise the built-in flash.

Caution

Continuous shooting speed is slower when a flash fires during continuous Live
View shooting. The camera keeps shooting at the lower continuous shooting speed
even after the flash stops firing.

127
Food Mode

When you want to take pictures of food, use the [ ] (Food) mode. The photo will look bright
and appetizing. Also, the reddish tinge due to the light source will be suppressed in the
pictures taken under tungsten lights, etc.

Shooting tips

Change the color tone.

You can change [Color tone]. To increase the food's reddish tinge, set it toward [Warm
tone] (red). Set it toward [Cool tone] (blue) if it looks too red.

Caution

The warm color cast of subjects may fade.

When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of the
picture may not be reduced.
If you use a flash, [Color tone] will be set to default.
If there are people in the picture, the skin tone may not be reproduced properly.

128
Candlelight Mode

When you want to photograph a person in candlelight, use the [ ] (Candlelight) mode. The
atmosphere of candlelight is reflected in the color tones of the picture.

Shooting tips

Use the center AF point to focus.

Aim the center AF point in the viewfinder on the subject, then shoot.

Prevent camera shake if the numeric display (shutter speed) in the viewfinder
blinks.
Under low light where camera shake tends to occur, the viewfinder's shutter speed
display will blink. When using a zoom lens, consider zooming out and either holding the
camera steady or using a tripod. When using a zoom lens, you can reduce the blur
caused by camera shake by setting the lens to the wide-angle end.

Change the color tone.

You can change [Color tone]. To increase the candlelight's reddish tinge, set toward
[Warm tone] (red), or set toward [Cool tone] (blue) if it looks too red.

Adjust brightness.
You can change [Brightness]. To brighten the image, set toward +, or set toward – if
the image is too bright.

Caution

Live View shooting is not possible.

The flash will not fire. However, raising the flash beforehand is recommended, to
enable firing of the AF-assist beam ( ).

Note

The AF method is set to [1-point AF] and cannot be changed.

129
Night Portrait Mode

When you want to photograph people at night and obtain a natural-looking night scene in the
background, use the [ ] (Night Portrait) mode. Note that shooting in this mode requires
the built-in flash or a Speedlite. Using a tripod is recommended.

Shooting tips

Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.

When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide night view. Because
camera shake occurs in handheld shooting, using a tripod is also recommended.

Check the image brightness.

It is recommended to play back the captured image on location to check the image
brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer and shoot again.

Also shoot in other shooting modes.

Consider also shooting in < > and [ ] mode, because shots are more likely to be
blurry.

Caution

Tell subjects to remain still for a moment after the flash fires.
During Live View shooting, achieving focus may be difficult when the face of the
subject looks dark. In this case, set the lens's focus mode switch to < > and
focus manually.
When you shoot a night scene with Live View shooting, achieving focus with AF
may be difficult if point sources of light are found in the AF point. In this case, set
the lens's focus mode switch to < > and focus manually.
The Live View image displayed will not look exactly the same as the actual
captured image.

130
 Note

If you use the self-timer together with a flash, the self-timer lamp will light up briefly
after the picture is taken.

131
Handheld Night Scene Mode

The [ ] (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot night scenes even in handheld
shooting. In this shooting mode, four shots are taken consecutively for each picture, and the
resulting image with reduced camera shake is recorded.

Shooting tips

Hold the camera steady.

Keep your elbows close to your body to hold the camera steady ( ). In this mode, four
shots are aligned and merged into a single image, but if there is significant misalignment
in any of the four shots due to camera shake, they may not align properly in the final
image.

For portraits, use flash.

If your shots will include people, use the built-in flash or a Speedlite. For nicer portraits,
flash is used for the first shot. Tell the subject not to move until all four consecutive shots
are taken.

132
 Caution

Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.

RAW image quality cannot be set.
When you shoot a night scene with Live View shooting, achieving focus with AF
may be difficult if point sources of light are found in the AF point. In this case, set
the lens's focus mode switch to < > and focus manually.
The Live View image displayed will not look exactly the same as the actual
captured image.
If you use a flash and the subject is close, overexposure may result.
If you use a flash for a night scene with limited lighting, the shots may not align
correctly, which may result in a blurry picture.
If you use a flash with a human subject close to the background that is also
illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align correctly. This may result in a
blurry picture. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors may also appear.
Flash coverage angle with a Speedlite:
• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the zoom
position will be fixed to the wide (wide-angle) end regardless of the lens's zoom
position.
• When using a Speedlite requiring manual flash coverage setting, set the flash
head to the normal position.
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject's movement may leave afterimages or
the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly misaligned due to
camera shake.
It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. “buSY” and “BUSY” appear in the viewfinder and on the screen,
respectively, as images are processed, and shooting is not possible until
processing is finished.

133
HDR Backlight Control Mode

When shooting a scene having both the bright and dark areas, use the [ ] ( HDR
Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this mode, three consecutive shots
are taken at different exposures. This results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has
minimized the clipped shadows caused by backlighting.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.

Shooting tips

Hold the camera steady.

Keep your elbows close to your body to hold the camera steady ( ). In this mode, three
shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if there is significant
misalignment in any of the three shots due to camera shake, they may not align properly
in the final image.

Caution

Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.

RAW image quality cannot be set.
Flash photography is not possible.
Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look
irregular or have significant noise.
HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit scenes or
extremely high-contrast scenes.
When shooting subjects that are sufficiently bright as they are, for example for
normally lit scenes, the image may look unnatural due to the HDR effect.
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject's movement may leave afterimages or
the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly misaligned due to
camera shake.
It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. “buSY” and “BUSY” appear in the viewfinder and on the screen,
respectively, as images are processed, and shooting is not possible until
processing is finished.

134
Creative Filters Mode

Creative Filter Characteristics

Adjusting the Miniature Effect

You can shoot with filter effects applied. In Live View shooting, you can preview filter effects
before shooting.

1. Set the Mode dial to < >.

2. Display the Live View image.

Press the < > button to display the Live View image.

135
3. Select [Creative filters] with Quick Control.

Press the < > button ( ).

Use the < > < > keys to select the icon in the upper left, then
press < >.

4. Select a filter effect.

Turn the < > or < > dial to select a filter effect ( ), then press
< >.
The image is shown with the filter effect applied.

Note

If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when

setting functions, press the < > button after step 1 and select
[Choose filter].

136
 5. Adjust the effect and shoot.

Press the < > button and select an icon below [Creative filters]
(except , , , , or ).
Turn the < > or < > dial to adjust the effect, then press < >.

Caution

RAW and RAW+JPEG are not available. When RAW image quality is set, images
are captured with image quality. When RAW+JPEG image quality is set,
images are captured with the specified JPEG image quality.
Continuous shooting is not available when [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] is set.

Note

In Live View shooting

With Grainy B/W, the grainy preview will differ somewhat from the appearance of
your shots.
With Soft focus or Miniature effect options, the soft focus preview may differ
somewhat from the appearance of your shots.
No histogram is displayed.
A magnified view is not available.
In Live View shooting in Creative Zone modes, some Creative filter settings are
available from the Quick Control screen.

137
Creative Filter Characteristics

Grainy B/W
Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the contrast, you can change
the black-and-white effect.

Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change the degree of
softness.

Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have barrel distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along the periphery of the
image changes. Also, because this filter effect magnifies the center of the image, the
apparent resolution at the center may degrade depending on the number of recorded
pixels, so set the filter effect while checking the resulting image. One AF point is used,
fixed at the center.

Water painting effect

Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. By adjusting the effect,
you can change the color density. Note that night scenes or dark scenes may not be
rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.

Toy camera effect

Shifts colors to those typical of toy cameras and darkens the four corners of the image.
Color tone options can be used to change the color cast.

Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect.
Shooting under the default setting will keep the center looking sharp.
In Live View shooting, you can move the area that looks sharp (the scene frame) as
described in Miniature Effect Operations. [1-point AF] is used as the AF method.
Shooting with the AF point and scene frame aligned is recommended.
In viewfinder shooting, aim the center AF point shown in the viewfinder on the subject,
then shoot.

HDR art standard

Photos retain more detail in highlights and shadows. With reduced contrast and flatter
gradation, the finish resembles a painting. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark)
edges.

HDR art vivid

The colors are more saturated than with [ HDR art standard], and the low contrast
and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.

HDR art bold

The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and the picture looks like
an oil painting.

138
 HDR art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are decreased to make the
picture look flat, so that the picture looks faded and old. The subject outlines will have
bright (or dark) edges.

Caution

[ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] precautions
Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
Live View previews of the filter effects will not look exactly the same as your shots.
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject's movement may leave afterimages, or
the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly misaligned due to
camera shake.
Be careful about camera shake in handheld shots.
Subjects such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered with smooth gradation
and may have noise or irregular exposure or colors.
Shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color
reproduction of the illuminated areas.
It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. “buSY” and “BUSY” appear in the viewfinder and on the screen,
respectively, as images are processed, and shooting is not possible until
processing is finished.
Flash photography is not possible. However, raising the flash beforehand is
recommended, to enable firing of the AF-assist beam ( ).

Note

With [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ], you can shoot high dynamic range photos that
retain detail in highlights and shadows of high-contrast scenes. Three consecutive
images are captured at different brightnesses each time you shoot and used to
create a single image. See the precautions for [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].

139
Adjusting the Miniature Effect

1. Move the AF point.

Move the AF point to the position to focus on.

2. Move the scene frame and shoot.

Move the scene frame if the AF point is outside of it, so that the AF
point is aligned with it.
To make the scene frame movable (displayed in orange), press the
< > button or tap [ ] in the lower right of the screen. By tapping
[ ], you can also switch between vertical and horizontal scene frame
orientation. Switching scene frame orientation is also possible with the
< >< > keys when in horizontal orientation and < > < >
keys when in vertical orientation.
Turn the < > or < > dial to move the scene frame. To center the
scene frame again, press the < > button.
To confirm the position of the scene frame, press < >.

140
Creative Zone

Creative Zone modes give you the freedom to shoot in a variety of ways by setting your
preferred shutter speed, aperture value, exposure, and more.

To clear the shooting mode description displayed when you turn the Mode dial, press
< > ( ).

Note

Make sure the Multi-function lock feature is off ( ).

• Program AE Mode (P)

• Shutter-Priority AE Mode (Tv)
• Aperture-Priority AE Mode (Av)
• Manual Exposure Mode (M)
• Long (Bulb) Exposures
• Mirror Lockup

141
Program AE Mode (P)

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to suit the subject's
brightness.
* < > stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.

1. Set the Mode dial to < >.

2. Focus on the subject.

As you look through the viewfinder, aim the AF point over the subject,
then press the shutter button halfway.
After the camera focuses, the focus indicator < > in the lower right of
the viewfinder lights up (in One-Shot AF mode).
The shutter speed and aperture value will be set automatically and
displayed in the viewfinder.

142
 3. Check the display.

Standard exposure is available unless the shutter speed and aperture

value are blinking.

4. Take the picture.

Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely.

Caution

If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number blink, it indicates underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.

If the “4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number blink, it indicates
overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold separately) to reduce the amount of
light entering the lens.

143
 Note

Differences between < > and < > modes

In < > mode, many functions, such as the AF method and metering mode, are
set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can set are limited.
On the other hand, with < > mode, only the shutter speed and aperture value are
set automatically. You can freely set the AF method, metering mode, and other
functions.

Program shift
With Program AE, you can freely change the combination (program) of shutter
speed and aperture value set by the camera while maintaining the same exposure.
This is called Program shift.
With Program shift, you can press the shutter button halfway, then turn the < >
dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture value is displayed.
Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture is taken.
Program shift cannot be used with flash.

144
Shutter-Priority AE Mode (Tv)

In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture
value to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. A faster
shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create
a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.
*< > stands for Time value.

Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)

Frozen motion
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)

1. Set the Mode dial to < >.

145
 2. Set the desired shutter speed.

Set with the < > dial.

3. Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

4. Check the display and shoot.

As long as the aperture value is not blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.

Caution

If the lowest aperture value blinks, it indicates underexposure.

Turn the < > dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture value stops
blinking or set a higher ISO speed.

If the highest aperture value blinks, it indicates overexposure.

Turn the < > dial to set a faster shutter speed until the aperture value stops
blinking, or set a lower ISO speed.

146
 Note

Shutter speed display

Shutter speeds are indicated on the screen as a fraction but abbreviated in the
viewfinder, where only the denominator is indicated. For example, “125” in the
viewfinder stands for 1/125 sec. Additionally, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"”, 15
sec.

147
Aperture-Priority AE Mode (Av)

In this mode, you set the desired aperture value and the camera sets the shutter speed
automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject brightness. A higher
f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall
within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will
make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.
*< > stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).

Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)

Sharp foreground and background

(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

148
1. Set the Mode dial to < >.

2. Set the desired aperture value.

Set with the < > dial.

3. Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

4. Check the display and shoot.

As long as the shutter speed is not blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.

149
 Caution

If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure.

Turn the < > dial to decrease the aperture value (open the aperture) until the
shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed.

If the “4000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure.

Turn the < > dial to increase aperture value (close the aperture) until the
shutter speed blinking stops or set a lower ISO speed.

Note

Aperture value display

The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The f/number
displayed varies depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the camera, “00”
will be displayed for the aperture.

150
 Depth-of-Field Preview

Press the depth-of-field preview button to stop down the lens to the current aperture value
and check the area in focus (depth of field).

Note

The larger the aperture value, the wider the area (from the foreground to the
background) in focus, but the darker the viewfinder display.
The depth-of-field effect is readily apparent on the Live View image as you change
the aperture value and press the depth-of-field preview button ( ).
Exposure is locked (AE lock) as you hold down the depth-of-field preview button.

151
Manual Exposure Mode (M)

In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture value as desired. To determine
the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder or use a commercially
available exposure meter.
*< > stands for Manual.

1. Set the Mode dial to < >.

2. Set the ISO speed.

With ISO Auto, you can set exposure compensation ( ).

152
3. Set the shutter speed and aperture value.

To set the shutter speed (1), turn the < > dial, and to set the
aperture value (2), turn the < > dial.

153
4. Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

(1) Standard exposure index

(2) Exposure level mark

The exposure setting will be displayed in the viewfinder.

Check the exposure level mark < > to see how far the current
exposure level is from the standard exposure level.

5. Set the exposure and take the picture.

Check the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter speed
and aperture value.

< > or < > is shown at the ends of the exposure level indicator if the
exposure level exceeds ±3 stops (or in the viewfinder, ±2 stops) from
standard exposure.

154
 Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto

If the ISO speed is set to “ ” (AUTO) for manual exposure shooting, you can set exposure
compensation ( ) as follows:

[ : Expo.comp./AEB]
By holding down < > and turning the < > dial when [ ] in the [13: Custom
Controls] setting of [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)] is set to [ Expo comp (hold
btn, turn )].
Quick Control screen

Caution

Exposure may not be as expected when ISO Auto is set, because the ISO speed is
adjusted to ensure standard exposure for your specified shutter speed and
aperture value. In this case, set the exposure compensation.
Exposure compensation is not applied in flash photography with ISO Auto, even if
you have set an exposure compensation amount.

Note

To enable Auto Lighting Optimizer to be specified in < > mode as well, clear the
[ ] mark for [Disable during man expo] in [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] ( ).
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the < > button to lock the ISO speed.
If you press the < > button and recompose the shot, you can see the exposure
level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to when the < >
button was pressed.
Any existing exposure compensation amount is maintained if you switch to < >
mode with ISO Auto after using exposure compensation in < >, < >, or
< > mode ( ).
To coordinate exposure compensation in ½-stop increments with ISO speed set in
⅓-stop increments when [1: Exposure level increments] in [ : Custom
Functions(C.Fn)] is set to [1:1/2-stop] and used with ISO Auto, exposure
compensation is further adjusted by adjusting shutter speed. However, the shutter
speed displayed will not change.

155
Long (Bulb) Exposures

In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely,
and closes when you let go of the shutter button. Use bulb exposures for night scenes,
fireworks, astrophotography, and other subjects requiring long exposures.

1. Set the Mode dial to < >.

2. Set the shutter speed to [BULB].

Turn the < > dial to the left to set [BULB].

3. Take the picture.

The exposure will continue for as long as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.

The elapsed exposure time will be displayed on the screen.

156
 Caution

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
Long bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual.
If ISO Auto is set, ISO 400 will be set ( ).
When shooting bulb exposures with both the self-timer and mirror lockup, keep
pressing the shutter button completely until shooting is finished (when the self-timer
and bulb exposure time have elapsed). No shot will be taken if you release the
shutter button during self-timer countdown, although a shutter-release sound will be
played.

Note

With [ : Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise generated during
long exposures ( ).
Using a tripod is recommended for bulb exposures. You can also use mirror lockup
( ).
You can shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold
separately, ).
You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold
separately, ). When you press the remote controller's release (transmit) button,
the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button again to
stop the bulb exposure.

157
Mirror Lockup

You can use the mirror lockup function to prevent the disturbing mechanical vibrations
(mirror shock) when shooting with super telephoto lenses or shooting close-ups (macro
photography).

1. Configure the mirror lockup setting.

Set [10: Mirror lockup] in [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)] to [1:Enable]

( ).

2. Focus on the subject, then press the shutter button completely.

The mirror will swing up.

3. Press the shutter button completely again.

The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.

After taking the picture, set [Mirror lockup] to [0:Disable].

158
Shooting tips

Also set the self-timer to [ ] or [ ].

When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror locks up. The picture will be
then taken 10 sec. or 2 sec. later.

Shoot remotely.
Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken, remote control shooting
together with mirror lockup can further reduce the camera vibration blur ( ).
With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) set to the 2 sec. delay, press the
release button to lock up the mirror, and the picture will be taken 2 sec. after the mirror
lockup.
With Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately), press the release button completely to
lock up the mirror, and press it completely again to take the picture.

Caution

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day, take the
picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.
When shooting with mirror lockup, if you use both the self-timer and bulb
exposures, keep pressing the shutter button completely (for self-timer delay time +
bulb exposure time). No shot will be taken if you release the shutter button during
self-timer countdown, although a shutter-release sound will be played.
During mirror lockup, shooting function settings, menu operations, etc. are
disabled.
When you use flash, the red-eye reduction lamp will not light up.

Note

Even if you set the drive mode to [ ], [ ], or [ ], the camera will still shoot in
the single shooting mode.
When [ : High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise Reduction], four
consecutive shots will be taken for a single picture regardless of the [Mirror
lockup] setting.
If approx. 30 sec. elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely locks up the mirror again.
When shooting with mirror lockup, using a tripod and Wireless Remote Control
BR-E1 (sold separately, ) or Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately, ) is
recommended.

159
AF, Drive, and Exposure Settings

This chapter describes how to configure AF, drive mode, metering mode, and related
settings.

Caution

< > stands for autofocus. < > stands for manual focus.

• AF Operation
• Selecting the AF Area and AF Point (Viewfinder Shooting)
• Selecting the AF Methods (Live View Shooting)
• Manual Focus
• Drive Mode
• Using the Self-Timer
• Remote Control Shooting

• Metering Mode

• Exposure Compensation

• Exposure Lock (AE Lock)

160
AF Operation

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

AI Servo AF (Viewfinder Shooting) or Servo AF (Live View Shooting) for Moving

Subjects

AI Focus AF (Viewfinder Shooting) for Automatic Switching of AF Operation

AF-Assist Beam

AF Points Lighting Up in Red (Viewfinder Shooting)

You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject. In
Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation is set automatically for the respective
shooting mode.

1. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >.

2. Turn the Mode dial to a Creative Zone.

3. Press the < > button.

161
 4. Select the AF operation.

Press the < >< > keys.

: One-Shot AF
: AI Focus AF
: AI Servo AF

In Live View shooting, press the < > button, then select [AF
operation].
: One-Shot AF
: Servo AF

Note

AF is also possible by pressing the < > button.

162
 One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

This AF operation is suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.

Viewfinder shooting

• Once a subject is in focus, the focusing AF point (1) is displayed, the focus indicator
< > (2) in the viewfinder lights up, and the camera beeps. The focus indicator
< > blinks if the camera cannot focus.
• With evaluative metering ( ), the exposure value is set as soon as a subject is in
focus.

Live View shooting

• Once a subject is in focus, the focusing AF point turns green and the camera beeps.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.

Note

If [ : Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved.
The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway, allowing
you to recompose the image before taking the picture. This is called “focus lock.”
See Lens Electronic MF when using a lens that supports electronic manual
focusing.

163
 AI Servo AF (Viewfinder Shooting) or Servo AF (Live View
Shooting) for Moving Subjects

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.

AI Servo AF (viewfinder shooting)

• Once a subject is in focus, the focusing AF point is displayed. The focus indicator
< > in the viewfinder does not light up when subjects are in focus.

Servo AF (Live View shooting)

• Once a subject is in focus, the focusing AF point turns blue.

Note

The beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

164
 AI Focus AF (Viewfinder Shooting) for Automatic
Switching of AF Operation

AF operation automatically switches from [One-Shot AF] to [AI Servo AF] based on subject
status.

After the camera uses [One-Shot AF] to focus on a subject, if it detects subject
movement, a change in distance, or similar changes, it switches to [AI Servo AF] and
continues to track the moving subject.

Note

The camera continues beeping quietly when subjects are in focus using the servo.
The focus indicator < > in the viewfinder does not light up when subjects are in
focus using the servo.
Shooting with the focus locked is not possible when the servo is used.
In < > mode in Live View shooting, [AI Focus AF] is used to focus. Note that
[Servo AF] is used to focus on moving subjects. When focus is achieved, the AF
point will turn blue. Note that the camera does not switch to [Servo AF] if the
subject moves during continuous shooting.

165
 AF-Assist Beam

In viewfinder shooting, the built-in flash or a Speedlite can emit an AF-assist beam to make
autofocusing easier under low light or in other conditions where autofocusing is difficult.

With the built-in flash, the AF-assist beam fires as needed after you raise the flash and
press the shutter button halfway.
With a Speedlite, configure the setting on the Speedlite as needed.

Caution

The flash does not emit an AF-assist beam when AF operation is set to [AI Servo
AF].

Note

To disable AF-assist beam firing, set [ : AF-assist beam firing] to [Disable].

166
 AF Points Lighting Up in Red (Viewfinder Shooting)

The AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in low-light conditions or on a dark
subject. You can disable lighting up in Creative Zone modes ( ).

167
Selecting the AF Area and AF Point (Viewfinder
Shooting)

AF Area Selection Mode

Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode

Selecting the AF Point or Zone Manually

Meaning of Lit or Blinking AF Points

Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult

The number of available AF points, the focusing patterns, and the Area AF frame shape vary
by lens. For details, refer to Compatible Lenses and Autofocusing (Viewfinder Shooting).

AF Area Selection Mode

Four AF area selection modes are available. For instructions on choosing a mode, see
Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode.

Manual selection:1 pt AF

The camera focuses using a single AF point.

168
Manual select.:Zone AF

The camera focuses in a zone consisting of nine AF points. Subjects are easier to
acquire than with 1-point AF.
Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note that any detected faces are given priority
in focusing.
With [AI Servo AF], focusing continues as long as subjects can be tracked within the
zone.

Manual select.:Large Zone AF

The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right) for focusing.
Subjects are easier to acquire than with Zone AF.
Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note that any detected faces are given priority
in focusing.
With [AI Servo AF], focusing continues as long as subjects can be tracked within the
large zone.

169
Auto selection AF

The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus.

With [One-Shot AF], generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note that any detected
faces are given priority in focusing.
With [AI Servo AF], focusing continues as long as the Area AF frame can track the
subject.

Caution

AF points may not track subjects under some shooting conditions when [AI Servo
AF] is used with [Manual select.:Zone AF], [Manual select.:Large Zone AF], or
[Auto selection AF].
Focusing may be difficult when using a peripheral AF point or a wide-angle or
telephoto lens. In such a case, use the center AF point or an AF point close to the
center.
When the AF point(s) light up, part or all of the viewfinder may light up in red, which
is a characteristic of AF point display.
In low temperatures, the AF point display may be difficult to see or have a slower
tracking response due to the nature of the AF point display device (using liquid
crystal).

170
Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode

1. Press the < > or < > button ( ).

2. Press the < > button.

Each time you press the < > button, the AF area selection mode
changes.

Note

The AF area selection mode can be selected in Creative Zone modes by pressing
the < > or < > button, then turning the < > dial when [7: AF area
selection method] in [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)] is set to [1: →Main Dial]
( ).

171
Selecting the AF Point or Zone Manually

1. Press the < > or < > button ( ).

172
 2. Select an AF point or zone.

To select AF points horizontally and vertically, you can turn the < >
dial and < > dial, respectively.
Turning the < > or < > dial switches zones (or cycles through
Zone AF zones) in Zone AF and Large Zone AF modes.

Note

When you keep holding down the < > button and turn the < > dial, you can
select an AF point vertically.
The following information is displayed in the viewfinder when you press the < >
or < > button.
• Manual select.:Zone AF, Manual select.:Large Zone AF, Auto selection AF:
AF
• Manual selection:1 pt AF: SEL (center), SEL AF (off center)

173
 Meaning of Lit or Blinking AF Points

Pressing the < > or < > button lights up the AF points that are cross-type AF points
for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF points are horizontal-line or vertical-line
sensitive.

174
 Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult

Subjects with very low contrast.

(Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.)
Subjects in very low light.
Strongly backlit or reflective subjects.
(Example: Cars with highly reflective surfaces, etc.)
Near and distant subjects positioned close to an AF point.
(Example: Animals in cages, etc.)
Light source such as dots of light positioned close to an AF point.
(Example: Night scenes, etc.)
Subjects with repetitive patterns.
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
Subjects with finer patterns than an AF point.
(Example: Faces or flowers as small as or smaller than an AF point, etc.)

In such cases, focus in either of the following two ways.

1. With [One-Shot AF], focus on an object at the same distance as the subject and lock
the focus, then recompose the shot ( ).
2. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < > and focus manually ( ).

Note

Depending on the subject, focus can be achieved by slightly recomposing the shot
and performing AF operation again.

175
Selecting the AF Methods (Live View Shooting)

AF Method

Selecting the AF Method

Magnified View

AF Shooting Tips

Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult

AF Range

AF Method

: +Tracking

The camera detects and focuses on people's faces. An AF point [ ] appears over any face
detected, which is then tracked.
If no face is detected, the entire AF area is used for focusing.

: Spot AF

The camera focuses in a narrower area than [1-point AF].

176
 : 1-point AF

The camera focuses using a single AF point [ ].

: Zone AF

Focuses in a wide Zone AF frame, which makes it easier to acquire subjects than with [1-
point AF].
Prioritizes focusing on the nearest subject. Faces of any people in the Zone AF frame are
also given priority in focusing.
AF points in focus are displayed with < >.

177
Selecting the AF Method

1. Press the < > button.

2. Select the AF method.

Each time you press the < > button, the AF method changes.

You can also make your selection from [ : AF method].

Note

In < > mode, [ +Tracking] is set automatically.

Regarding the Touch Shutter (AF and shutter release by touch operation), see
Shooting with the Touch Shutter.

178
 +Tracking:
The camera detects and focuses on people's faces. If a face moves, the AF point [ ] also
moves to track the face.
You can set [Eye Detection AF] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject's eyes in focus ( ).
* These instructions apply to the camera with AF operation set to [One-Shot AF] ( ). With [Servo
AF] ( ) set, the AF point will turn blue when focus is achieved.

1. Check the AF point.

An AF point [ ] appears over any face detected.

If [ ] is displayed, you can use the < >< > keys to choose a
face to focus on.
Press < > to move the AF point to the face of the person in the
center of the screen.

179
 2. Focus and take the picture.

Once you press the shutter button halfway and the subject is in focus,
the AF point turns green and the camera beeps.
An orange AF point indicates that the camera could not focus on
subjects.

Tapping a face for focus

Tapping a face or subject to focus on changes the AF point to [ ] and focuses where you
tap.
Even if the face or subject moves on the screen, the AF point [ ] moves to track it.

Caution

If the subject's face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be possible.
Adjust the focus manually ( ) so that the face can be detected, then perform AF.
An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture, too
bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
AF cannot detect subjects or people's faces at the edges of the screen.
Recompose the shot to center the subject or bring the subject closer to the center.

Note

The active [ ] may cover only a part of the face, not the whole face.
The size of the AF point changes depending on the subject.

180
Spot AF/1-point AF/Zone AF
You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, 1-point AF screens are used as
an example.

1. Check the AF point.

The AF point (1) will appear. With Zone AF, the Zone AF frame is
displayed.

2. Move the AF point.

Use the < > < > < >< > keys to move the AF point to where
you want to focus (but note that with some lenses, it may not move to
the edge of the screen).
You can also tap the screen to move the AF point.
To center the AF point or Zone AF frame, press < >.
You can also center the AF point by tapping < >.

181
 3. Focus and take the picture.

Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.
When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper
will sound. If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.

Caution

AF points may not track subjects under some shooting conditions when [Servo AF]
is used with Zone AF.
Focusing may be difficult when using a peripheral AF point. In this case, select an
AF point in the center.

182
Eye Detection AF
With the AF method set to [ +Tracking], you can shoot with the subject's eyes in focus.

1. Select [ : Eye Detection AF].

2. Select [Enable].

183
 3. Aim the camera at the subject.

An AF point is displayed around their eye.

You can tap the screen to select an eye for focus.
The entire face is selected when you tap other facial features, such as
their nose or mouth. Eyes to focus on are selected automatically.
When [ ] is displayed, you can choose an eye or face to focus on
with the < >< > keys, depending on the [Eye Detection AF]
setting.

4. Take the picture.

Caution

Subject eyes may not be detected correctly, depending on the subject and shooting
conditions.

Note

To switch to [Eye Detection AF: Disable] without using menu operations, press
the < > button and then the < > button. To switch to [Eye Detection AF:
Enable], press the < > button again.

184
 Magnified View

To check the focus when the AF method is other than [ +Tracking], magnify display by
approx. 5× or 10× by pressing the < > button (or tapping ).

Magnification is centered on the AF point for [Spot AF] or [1-point AF] and on the Zone
AF frame for [Zone AF].
Autofocusing is performed with magnified display if you press the shutter button halfway
when set to [Spot AF], and [1-point AF]. When set to AF methods other than [Spot AF]
and [1-point AF], autofocusing is performed after restoring normal display.
With Servo AF, if you press the shutter button halfway in the magnified view, the camera
will return to the normal view for focusing.

Caution

If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and perform
AF.
If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnified view, accurate
focus may not be achieved.
AF speed differs between the normal view and magnified view.
Continuous AF and Movie Servo AF are not available when display is magnified.
With the magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

185
AF Shooting Tips

Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again.
Image brightness may change during autofocusing.
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus, or the
continuous shooting speed may decrease.
If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may flicker, and focusing may be
difficult. In this case, restart the camera and resume shooting with AF under the light
source you will use.
If focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually ( ).
For subjects at the edge of the screen that are slightly out of focus, try centering the
subject (or AF point, or Zone AF frame) to bring them into focus, then recompose the
shot before shooting.
With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with autofocus, or accurate
focusing may not be achieved.

186
 Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult

Subjects with low contrast, such as a blue sky or flat surfaces in solid colors, or other
cases when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
Subjects in low light.
Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction.
Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards,
etc.).
Fine lines and subject outlines.
Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps changing.
Night scenes or points of light.
The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.
Extremely small subjects.
Subjects at the edge of the screen.
Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.).
Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal in a cage, etc.).
Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still due to camera shake
or subject blur.
Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
A special effect filter is used.
Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.

AF Range

The available autofocus range varies depending on the lens used and aspect ratio and
whether you are using features such as Movie digital IS.

187
Manual Focus

Viewfinder Shooting

Live View Shooting

Setting MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis)

If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, follow the procedure below to focus manually.

Viewfinder Shooting

1. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >.

2. Focus on the subject.

Turn the lens focusing ring (1) until the subject looks sharp in the
viewfinder.

Note

The focus indicator < > is lit when subjects are in focus as you press the shutter
button halfway in manual focusing.
With Automatic selection AF, when the center AF point achieves focus, the focus
indicator < > will light up.

188
 Live View Shooting

You can magnify the image when focusing.

1. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >.

Turn the lens focusing ring to focus roughly.

2. Magnify the image.

Each press of the < > button switches from normal display to 5× to
10× display.

189
 3. Move the magnified area.

Use the < > < > < >< > keys to move the magnified area
into position for focusing.
To center the magnified area, press < >.

4. Focus manually.

While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens focusing ring to
focus.

After achieving focus, press the < > button to return to the normal
view.

Note

In magnified view, the exposure is locked.

You can use the Touch Shutter to take a picture during normal display.

190
 Setting MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis)

In Live View shooting, edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color to make focusing
easier. You can set the outline color and adjust the sensitivity (level) of edge detection
(except in < > mode).

1. Select [ : MF peaking settings].

2. Select [Peaking].

Select [On].

3. Set the level and color.

Set it as necessary.

191
 Caution

Peaking display is not shown during magnified display.

During HDMI output, peaking display is not shown on equipment connected via
HDMI.
MF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when ISO
expansion is set. If necessary, lower the ISO speed or set [Peaking] to [Off].

Note

Peaking display shown on the screen is not recorded in images.

192
Drive Mode

1. Press the < > button.

2. Select the drive mode.

[ ] Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be taken.

[ ] High speed continuous

When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously at max.
approx. 7.0 shots/sec. (Live View shooting: max. approx. 7.5 shots/sec.) while you
keep holding it down. When the AF operation is set to [Servo AF] in Live View shooting,
the continuous shooting speed will be max. approx. 4.5 shots/sec.

[ ] Low speed continuous/Continuous shooting

When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously at max.
approx. 3.0 shots/sec. while you keep holding it down.

[ ] Self-timer: 10 sec/remote control

[ ] Self-timer: 2 sec/remote control

[ ] Self-timer:Continuous
For self-timer shooting, see Using the Self-Timer. For remote control shooting, see
Remote Control Shooting.

193
 Caution

The maximum continuous shooting speed for < > ( ) is the value in
continuous shooting under these conditions: shooting with a fully charged Battery
Pack LP-E17 at a 1/1000 sec. or faster shutter speed and maximum aperture value
(depending on the lens), Image Stabilizer off (depending on the lens), at room
temperature (23°C/73°F), with flicker reduction disabled.
The continuous shooting speed for < > may become slower depending on
factors such as temperature, battery level, flicker reduction, shutter speed, aperture
value, subject conditions, brightness, AF operation, lens, live view shooting, built-in
flash use, and shooting function settings.
With [ : Anti-flicker shoot.] set to [Enable] ( ), shooting under flickering light
may decrease the maximum continuous shooting speed. Also, the continuous
shooting interval may become irregular and the release time lag may become
longer.
With AI Servo AF/Servo AF, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become
slower depending on the subject conditions and the lens used.
If the battery temperature is low due to a low ambient temperature, the maximum
continuous shooting speed may become slower.
When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the continuous
shooting speed may drop off because shooting will be temporarily disabled ( ).

194
Using the Self-Timer

1. Press the < > button.

2. Select the self-timer.

/ : Shoot in 10 sec.
Remote control shooting is also possible ( ).
/ : Shoot in 2 sec.
Remote control shooting is also possible ( ).
: Shoot continuously in 10 sec. for the specified number of
shots
Press the < > < > keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to
10) to be taken with the self-timer. Remote control shooting is not
possible.
[ ] and [ ] icons are displayed when the camera is paired with a
wireless remote control (sold separately, ).

195
 3. Take the picture.

Focus on the subject, then press the shutter button completely.

To check operation, look at the self-timer lamp, listen for beeps, or
watch the countdown in seconds on the screen.
The self-timer lamp blinks faster approx. 2 sec. before the shot.

Caution

With [ ], the shooting interval may become longer under some shooting
conditions, depending on image quality, use of flash, and other factors.
Light that enters the viewfinder may prevent suitable exposure.

Note

[ ] can be used to start shooting without touching the camera and avoid camera
shake when it is mounted on a tripod for still-life or long exposure shots.
After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image ( ) to check focus and
exposure is recommended.
When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock ( ) on an object at the
same distance as where you will stand.
To cancel the self-timer, either tap the screen or press < >.
If remote control shooting is enabled, the auto power off will take effect in approx. 2
min. even if [ : Auto power off] is set to 1 min. or less.

196
Remote Control Shooting

Wireless Remote Control BR-E1

Remote Switch RS-60E3

You can shoot remotely by using an optional Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, which pairs
via Bluetooth.

Wireless Remote Control BR-E1

You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet away from the camera. After
pairing the camera and BR-E1 ( ), set the drive mode to [ ] ( ).
For operation procedures, refer to the BR-E1 instruction manual.

Note

Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control
shooting.
The remote control can also be used for movie recording ( ).

197
 Remote Switch RS-60E3

Once connected to the camera, the switch enables you to shoot remotely over a wired
connection.
For operation procedures, refer to the RS-60E3 instruction manual.

1. Open the terminal cover.

2. Connect the plug to the remote control terminal.

198
Metering Mode

Four methods (metering modes) to measure the subject's brightness are provided. Normally,
evaluative metering is recommended. In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set
automatically. (In the < : > and < : > modes, center-weighted average
metering is set.)

1. Select [ : Metering mode].

2. Select an item.

: Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects. The camera adjusts
the exposure automatically to suit the scene.

: Partial metering
Effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting,
etc. Covers approx. 6.5% of the area at the center of the screen in viewfinder shooting
or approx. 5.8% in Live View shooting.

: Spot metering
Effective when metering a specific part of the subject. Covers approx. 2.0% of the area
at the center of the screen in viewfinder shooting or approx. 2.9% in Live View shooting.
The spot metering circle will be displayed in the viewfinder.

199
 : Center-weighted average
The metering across the screen is averaged, with the center of the screen weighted
more heavily.

Caution

With (Evaluative metering), holding down the shutter button halfway locks the
exposure value (AE lock) after the camera focuses with [One-Shot AF]. With
(Partial metering), (Spot metering), or (Center-weighted average), exposure
is set at the moment the picture is taken (without locking the exposure value when
the shutter button is pressed halfway).

200
Exposure Compensation

Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken (decreased exposure)

the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation is available in < >, < >, < >, and < > modes. For
details on exposure compensation when < > mode and ISO Auto are both set, see
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto.

1. Check the exposure.

Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level
indicator.

2. Set the compensation amount.

Increased exposure, to brighten images

Decreased exposure, to darken images

Set with the < > dial.

The exposure compensation range is ±3 stops in Live View shooting,
movie recording, and when [ : Shooting screen] is set to [Guided].
The exposure compensation range is ±5 stops in viewfinder shooting
when [ : Shooting screen] is set to [Standard].
The exposure compensation amount displayed in the viewfinder goes
up to only ±2 stops.

3. Take the picture.

To cancel exposure compensation, set the exposure level < > to the
standard exposure index < >.

201
 Caution

If [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] ( ) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the
image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation for a darker
image is set.

Note

Setting the power switch to < > clears any compensation amount that was
set. To retain the setting even after the power switch is set to < >, set [5:
Exposure comp. auto cancel] in [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)] to [1:Disable].
[ ] or [ ] is shown at the ends of the exposure level indicator if the exposure
compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops (or in the viewfinder, ±2 stops).
To set compensation beyond ±2 stops, consider using the Quick Control ( )
screen or [ : Exposure comp./AEB setting] ( ).

202
Exposure Lock (AE Lock)

You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure separately or when
you are to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting. Press the < > button to lock
the exposure, then recompose and take the picture. It is effective for shooting backlit
subjects, etc.

1. Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

2. Press the < > button ( ).

A [ ] icon is displayed in the viewfinder or on the screen, indicating

that the exposure is locked (AE lock).
Each time you press the < > button, the current exposure setting is
locked.

3. Recompose and take the picture.

When you are to take more pictures while maintaining the AE lock,
keep holding down the < > button and press the shutter button to
take another picture.

203
 Caution

If [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] ( ) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the
image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation for a darker
image is set.

AE Lock Effects

AF Point Selection ( , )
Metering mode ( )
Automatic Selection Manual Selection
Exposure value centered on the AF point Exposure value centered on the
in focus is locked. selected AF point is locked.
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.

* When < > is set and the lens's focus mode switch is set to < >, AE lock is applied with the
exposure value weighted on the center AF point.

Note

AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.

204
Flash Photography

This chapter describes how to shoot with the built-in flash or an external flash (EL/EX series
Speedlites).

to the right of page titles indicates functions only available in Creative Zone modes
(< >, < >, < >, or < >).

Caution

Flash cannot be used while you are recording movies.

AEB is not available in flash photography.

• Shooting With the Built-in Flash

• Flash Function Settings
• Shooting With External Flash Units
• Wireless Flash Photography Using Optical Transmission
• Easy Wireless Flash
• Custom Wireless Flash

205
Shooting With the Built-in Flash

Approximate Built-in Flash Range

Shutter Speed and Aperture Value in Flash Photography

Shooting With FE Lock

Using the built-in flash is recommended when the [ ] icon appears in the viewfinder or on
the screen, when subjects in daytime shots are backlit, or when shooting under low light.

1. Manually raise the flash.

In Creative Zone modes, shooting with flash is possible whenever the

flash is raised.
While the flash is charging, “buSY” is displayed in the viewfinder, and
[BUSY] is displayed on the screen.

2. Press the shutter button halfway.

Confirm that a [ ] icon appears in the viewfinder or on the screen.

206
 3. Take the picture.

When focus is achieved and you press the shutter button completely,
the flash will fire at all times.
To retract the built-in flash after shooting, push it down with your fingers
until it clicks into place.

Shooting tips

In bright light, decrease the ISO speed.

If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks, decrease the ISO speed.

Detach the lens hood. Do not get too close to the subject.
If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject, the bottom of the
picture may look dark due to the obstructed flash light. For important shots, play back
the image and check to make sure the picture does not look unnaturally dark at the
bottom part.

Approximate Built-in Flash Range

(approx. range in meters/feet)

EF-S18-55mm f/4-5.6 IS STM

ISO Speed ( ) Wide-Angle End Telephoto End

f/4 f/5.6

100 1.0 – 3.0 / 3.3 – 9.8 1.0 – 2.1 / 3.3 – 7.0

1600 1.5 – 12.0 / 4.9 – 39.4 1.1 – 8.6 / 3.5 – 28.1

25600 6.0 – 48.0 / 19.8 – 157.4 4.3 – 34.3 / 14.1 – 112.5

* Rounded to the nearest tenth.

* It may not be possible to obtain standard exposure when shooting distant subjects at high ISO
speeds, or under certain subject conditions.

207
 Shutter Speed and Aperture Value in Flash Photography

Shooting Mode Shutter Speed Aperture Value

Auto (1/200–30 sec.)* Automatically set

Manual (1/200–30 sec.) Automatically set

Auto (1/200–30 sec.)* Manually set

Manual (1/200–30 sec.) Manually set

* When [Slow synchro] under [ : Flash control] is set to [1/200-30sec. auto].

Caution

Do not use the built-in flash unless it is fully raised.

The bottom of images may be dark if light from the built-in flash is obstructed by a
lens hood, or by a subject that is too close.

Note

If the bottom of images is dark when you use super telephoto or large-diameter
lenses, consider using an external Speedlite (sold separately, ).

208
 Shooting With FE Lock

The background or other factors may make subjects brighter or darker in flash photography
with subjects near the edge of the screen. In this case, use FE lock. After setting the flash
output for the appropriate subject brightness, you can recompose (put the subject toward the
side) and shoot. This feature can also be used with a Canon EL/EX series Speedlite.
* FE stands for Flash Exposure.

1. Manually raise the flash.

Press the shutter button halfway and look in the viewfinder to check
that the [ ] icon is lit.

2. Focus on the subject.

209
 3. Press the < > button ( ).

Center the subject in the viewfinder, then press the < > button.
A preflash is fired by the flash, and the flash output required for
shooting is retained.

In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed for a moment and [ ] will light up.
Each time you press the < > button, a preflash is fired, and the flash
output required for shooting is retained.

4. Take the picture.

Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely.

Caution

The [ ] icon blinks when subjects are too far away and your shots would be dark.
Approach the subject and repeat steps 2–4.
FE lock is not possible during Live View shooting.

210
Flash Function Settings

Flash Firing

E-TTL II Metering

Red-Eye Reduction

Slow Synchro

Built-in Flash Settings

External Flash Function Settings

External Flash Custom Function Settings

Clear Flash Settings/Clear All Speedlite Custom Functions

Functions of the built-in flash or external EL/EX series Speedlites can be set from menu
screens on the camera.
Before setting functions of external Speedlites, attach the Speedlite and turn it on.
For details on external Speedlite functions, refer to the Speedlite's instruction manual.

1. Select [ : Flash control].

211
2. Select an option.

212
Flash Firing

Set to [ ] (in Basic Zone or < > modes) to have the flash fire automatically, based on
shooting conditions.
Set to [ ] to have the flash always fire when you shoot.
Select [ ] (in Creative Zone modes) to keep the flash off, or if you will use the AF-assist
beam.

213
E-TTL II Metering

Set to [Eval (FacePrty)] for flash metering suitable for shots of people. Continuous
shooting speed for [ ] will become slower than when [Evaluative] or [Average] is
selected.
Set to [Evaluative] for flash metering that emphasizes firing in continuous shooting.
If [Average] is set, the flash exposure will be averaged for the entire metered scene.

Caution

Even with the camera set to [Eval (FacePrty)], results may not be as expected,
depending on the shooting conditions and subject.

214
 Red-Eye Reduction

Set to [Enable] to reduce red-eye by firing the red-eye reduction lamp before firing the flash.

215
 Slow Synchro

You can set the flash-sync speed for flash photography in < > mode or < > mode.

[ ] 1/200-30sec. auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200 sec. to 30 sec. to suit
the scene's brightness. Slow-sync shooting is used in low-light locations (under some
shooting conditions), and shutter speed is automatically lowered.

[ ] 1/200-1/60sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set automatically in low-light conditions. It is
effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake. However, while the subject will
be properly exposed with the flash, the background may come out dark.

[ ] 1/200 sec. (fixed)

The shutter speed is fixed at 1/200 sec, which is more effective in preventing subject
blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto]. However, in low light, the
subject's background will come out darker than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].

Caution

To use slow-sync shooting in < > or < > mode, set to [1/200-30sec. auto].

216
 Built-in Flash Settings

Flash mode
Set to [E-TTL II] to shoot in E-TTL II/E-TTL fully automatic flash mode. To enable [Flash
mode], select [CustWireless] in [Built-in flash].

Set to [Manual flash] to specify your preferred flash output manually.

217
Shutter sync.
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately after the shooting starts.
Set to [2nd curtain] and use low shutter speeds for natural-looking shots of subject motion
trails, such as car headlights.

Caution

When shooting with [2nd curtain], set a slow shutter speed of 1/80 sec. or slower.
If the shutter speed exceeds 1/80 sec., first-curtain synchronization is used
automatically even if [2nd curtain] is set.

218
 exp. comp.
Set the flash exposure compensation if the brightness of the subject does not come out as
desired (so you want to adjust the flash output) in flash photography. You can set the flash
exposure compensation up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

1. Select [ exp. comp.].

2. Set the compensation amount.

If the exposure is too dark, press the < > key (for increased
exposure).
If the exposure is too bright, press the < > key (for decreased
exposure).

When you press the shutter button halfway, the < > icon will appear
in the viewfinder.
After taking the picture, cancel the flash exposure compensation
by setting it back to 0.

219
 Caution

If [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] ( ) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the
image may still look bright even if a decreased flash exposure compensation is set.
If flash exposure compensation is set with a Speedlite (sold separately, ), you
cannot set the flash exposure compensation with the camera (Quick Control or
External flash func. setting). Note that the Speedlite's setting overrides the
camera's if both are set at the same time.

Note

The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set the
power switch to < >.

Wireless func.
See Wireless Flash Photography Using Optical Transmission if you will use the sender
function of the built-in flash in optical wireless shooting. Refer to the instruction manual of
the external flash unit if you will use the sender function of the external flash in radio or
optical wireless shooting.

220
 External Flash Function Settings

The information displayed, position of display, and available options vary depending on the
Speedlite model, its Custom Function settings, the flash mode, and other factors. Refer to
the instruction manual of your flash unit for details on its functions.

Sample display

(1) Flash mode

(2) Wireless func./Firing ratio control
(3) Flash zoom (flash coverage)
(4) Shutter synchronization
(5) Flash exposure compensation
(6) Flash exposure bracketing

Caution

Functions are limited when using EX series Speedlites that are not compatible with
flash function settings.

221
Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash photography.

• [E-TTL II] is the standard mode of EL/EX-series Speedlites that support autoexposure
flash photography.
• [Manual flash] is for setting the Speedlite's [Flash output] yourself.
• [CSP] (Continuous shooting priority mode) is available when using a compatible
Speedlite. This mode automatically reduces flash output by one stop and increases ISO
speed by one stop. Useful in continuous shooting, and helps conserve flash battery
power.
• Regarding other flash modes, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible
with the respective flash mode.

Caution

Adjust Exposure Compensation as needed in case of overexposure from flash

photography with [CSP] in < > or < > mode.

Note

With [CSP], ISO speed is automatically set to [Auto].

222
Wireless functions
You can use radio or optical wireless transmission to shoot with wireless multiple-flash
lighting.
For details on wireless flash, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible with
wireless flash photography.

Firing ratio control

With a macro flash, you can set the firing ratio control.
For details on firing ratio control, refer to the macro flash's Instruction Manual.

Flash zoom (flash coverage)

With Speedlites equipped with a zooming flash head, you can set the flash coverage.

223
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain synchronization] so that the flash fires immediately after
the shooting starts. Set to [Second-curtain synchronization] and use low shutter speeds
for natural-looking shots of subject motion trails, such as car headlights.
Set to [High-speed synchronization] for flash photography at higher shutter speeds than
the maximum flash sync shutter speed. This is effective when shooting with an open
aperture in < > mode to blur the background behind subjects outdoors in daylight, for
example.

Caution

When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/80 sec. or
slower. If the shutter speed exceeds 1/80 sec., first-curtain synchronization is used
automatically even if [Second-curtain synchronization] is set.

Flash exposure compensation

Just as exposure compensation is adjustable, you can also adjust flash output of external
Speedlites.

Caution

If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set the flash
exposure compensation with the camera. Note that the Speedlite's setting
overrides the camera's if both are set at the same time.

224
Flash exposure bracketing
External Speedlites equipped with flash exposure bracketing (FEB) can change the external
flash output automatically as three shots are taken at once.

225
 External Flash Custom Function Settings

For details on the external Speedlite's Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite's Instruction
Manual.

Caution

With an EL/EX series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always fire at full output if the
[Flash metering mode] Custom Function is set to [1:TTL] (autoflash).
The external Speedlite's Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled from
the camera's [ : External flash func. setting] screen. Set it directly on the
external Speedlite.

226
Clear Flash Settings/Clear All Speedlite Custom
Functions

1. Select [Clear settings].

2. Select the settings to be cleared.

Select [Clear built-in flash set.], [Clear external flash set.], or [Clear
ext. flash C.Fn set.].
On the confirmation screen, select [OK] to clear all flash settings or
Custom Function settings.

227
Shooting With External Flash Units

EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras

Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series

Non-Canon Flash Units

EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras

The camera supports flash photography using all functions of EL/EX series Speedlites (sold
separately).
For instructions, refer to the EL/EX series Speedlite's Instruction Manual.

Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series

With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL autoflash mode, the flash
can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera's shooting mode to < > or < > and adjust the aperture value
before shooting.
When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the manual flash mode.

228
 Non-Canon Flash Units

Sync speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at up to 1/200 sec. With
large studio flash units, the flash duration is longer than that of a compact flash unit and
varies depending on the model. Be sure to check before shooting if flash sync is properly
performed by test shooting at a sync speed of approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec.

Caution

Manually lower the built-in flash before attaching an external flash unit.
Using the camera with a dedicated flash unit or flash accessory for cameras of
other manufacturers poses a risk of malfunction and even damage.
Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit to the camera's hot shoe. It may not be fired.

229
Wireless Flash Photography Using Optical
Transmission

Receiver Setup and Positioning

Canceling Receiver Auto Power Off

Methods of Wireless Flash Photography Using Optical Transmission

You can use the built-in flash as the sender for external Canon Speedlites compatible with
optical wireless flash photography to shoot with wireless multiple-flash lighting.

230
 Receiver Setup and Positioning

Referring to the Instruction Manual of the Speedlite (receiver), configure the following
settings.

Set up the Speedlite as a receiver.

Set the camera and Speedlite to the same channel.
To control the flash ratio, set the receiver's flash group.
Position the camera and receiver within the following range.
Arrange the receiver with its wireless sensor facing the camera.

(1) Indoors
(2) Outdoors
(3) Approx. 10 m
(4) Approx. 7 m
(5) Approx. 80°
(6) Approx. 5 m
(7) Approx. 7 m

Canceling Receiver Auto Power Off

Press the camera's < > button. For manual flash, cancel by pressing the receiver's test
flash button.

231
 Methods of Wireless Flash Photography Using Optical
Transmission

You can use the camera in the following wireless flash photography. Choose a method of
shooting that suits your subject, shooting conditions, number of external flash units, or other
details.

Speedlite Settings
Built-In
No. of A:B Firing Wireless Link
Flash Firing Group
Units Ratio Functions
1 – – All ( )

1 – Used : – ( )

Multiple – – All ( )

Multiple Settings – (A:B) ( )

Fully automatic
shooting Multiple – Used + All and
(E-TTL II ( )
autoflash) Multiple Settings Used + (A:B)

• Flash exposure compensation

( )
• FE lock

Speedlite Settings
A:B Firing Built-In Flash Wireless Link
No. of Units Firing Group
Ratio Functions
1/multiple – – All
Multiple Settings – (A:B)
Manual flash ( )
1/multiple – Used + All and
Multiple Settings Used + (A:B)

*[ ]/[ ]: external Speedlite; [ ]/[ ]: built-in flash

Caution

To control receivers optically, the built-in flash fires even when set not to fire.

232
Easy Wireless Flash

Fully Automatic Shooting With One External Flash Unit

Fully Automatic Shooting With Multiple External Flash Units

Flash Exposure Compensation

These instructions describe simple and basic fully automatic wireless flash photography.

Fully Automatic Shooting With One External Flash Unit

1. Manually raise the flash.

233
2. Select [ : Flash control].

3. Select [Evaluative].

In [E-TTL II meter.], select [Evaluative].

4. Select [Built-in flash settings].

234
5. Select [EasyWireless].

In [Built-in flash], select [EasyWireless].

6. Configure [Channel].

Set the same channel (1–4) as the receiver.

7. Take the picture.

Just as in normal flash photography, shoot after configuring the

camera.

To stop wireless flash photography, set [Built-in flash] to

[NormalFiring].

235
 Note

Set [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative], which can usually obtain standard flash
exposure. If [Average] is set, the flash exposure will be averaged for the entire
metered scene. Depending on the scene, flash exposure compensation may be
necessary. This setting is for expert users.
[EasyWireless] is a setting option for photography without using the built-in flash,
but the flash will still fire in order to control receivers. Note that this firing to control
receivers may be visible in your shots, under some shooting conditions.
Test flash firing function is not available with receivers.

236
 Fully Automatic Shooting With Multiple External Flash
Units

You can have multiple receivers fire as if they were a single flash unit. This is convenient
when a high level of flash output is needed.

Set these basic settings.

Flash mode: E-TTL II

E-TTL II meter.: Evaluative
Built-in flash: EasyWireless
Channel: (same as receiver)

All flash units are controlled to fire with the same output and provide standard exposure.
All receivers fire as part of the same group, regardless of whether they are assigned to firing
group A, B, or C.

237
 Flash Exposure Compensation

If the results of shooting with flash look too dark or bright, you can set flash exposure
compensation to adjust the flash output.

1. Select [ Flash exposure compensation].

If shooting results are too dark, press the < > key to increase flash
output, for brighter results. If shooting results are too bright, press the
< > key to decrease flash output, for darker results.

238
Custom Wireless Flash

Fully Automatic Shooting With One External Flash Unit and the Built-in Flash

Fully Automatic Shooting With Multiple External Flash Units

Fully Automatic Shooting With Multiple External Flash Units and the Built-in Flash

Flash Exposure Compensation

FE Lock

Wireless Flash Photography With Manually Set Flash Output

Fully Automatic Shooting With One External Flash Unit

and the Built-in Flash

This fully automatic wireless flash photography uses one external flash unit and the built-in
flash.
You can adjust how shadows form on subjects by changing the ratio of flash output from the
external flash unit and the built-in flash.
In menus, [ ] and [ ] represent the external flash unit and [ ] and [ ] the built-in
flash.

239
1. Manually raise the flash.

2. Select [ : Flash control].

3. Select [Evaluative].

In [E-TTL II meter.], select [Evaluative].

240
4. Select [Built-in flash settings].

5. Select [CustWireless].

In [Built-in flash], select [CustWireless].

6. Select [Wireless func.].

In [Wireless func.], select [ : ].

241
 7. Set a firing ratio and take the picture.

Select [ : ] and set the firing ratio within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a firing
ratio to the right of 1:1 is not possible.

Note

If there is not enough flash output from the built-in flash, set a higher ISO speed
( ).
Firing ratios from 8:1 to 1:1 correspond to 3:1 to 1:1 (in 1/2-stop increments) when
converted to number of stops of exposure.

242
 Fully Automatic Shooting With Multiple External Flash
Units

Multiple receivers can be treated as a single flash unit or, if you prefer to adjust the firing
ratio, as separate groups.
The basic settings are as follows, and by adjusting the [Firing group] setting, you can set
up a variety of wireless multi-flash photography.

Set these basic settings.

Flash mode: E-TTL II

E-TTL II meter.: Evaluative
Wireless func.:
Channel: (same as receiver)

243
[ All] Firing multiple receivers as a single flash unit
This is convenient when a high level of flash output is needed. All flash units are controlled
to fire with the same output and provide standard exposure.
All receivers fire as part of the same group, regardless of whether they are assigned to firing
group A, B, or C.

1. Set [Firing group] to [ All].

2. Take the picture.

244
[ (A:B)] Firing multiple receivers in multiple groups
You can divide receivers into flash groups A and B, and you can adjust the relative output of
each to obtain the desired lighting.
Referring to the instruction manual of the flash unit, assign some receivers to firing group A
and others to firing group B, and arrange them as shown.

1. Manually raise the flash.

245
2. Select [ : Flash control].

3. Select [Evaluative].

In [E-TTL II meter.], select [Evaluative].

4. Select [Built-in flash settings].

246
5. Select [CustWireless].

In [Built-in flash], select [CustWireless].

6. Select [Wireless func.].

Select [ ].

7. Set [Firing group] to [ (A:B)].

247
 8. Set the A:B firing ratio and shoot.

Select [A:B fire ratio], and set the ratio.

Caution

Flash units in group C will not fire when [Firing group] is set to [ (A:B)].

Note

Firing ratios from 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 correspond to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 (in 1/2-stop
increments) when converted to number of stops of exposure.

248
 Fully Automatic Shooting With Multiple External Flash
Units and the Built-in Flash

The built-in flash can be added to Fully Automatic Shooting With Multiple External Flash
Units.
The basic settings are as follows, and by adjusting the [Firing group] setting, you can set
up a variety of wireless multi-flash photography that also uses the built-in flash.

Set these basic settings.

Flash mode: E-TTL II

E-TTL II meter.: Evaluative
Wireless func.: [ + ]
Channel: (same as receiver)

1. Select [Firing group].

Select the firing group, then set the firing ratio, flash exposure
compensation, and other required settings before shooting.

249
[ All and ]

[ (A:B) ]

250
 Flash Exposure Compensation

Available when [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II]. Note that the setting items available for
flash exposure compensation (see below) vary depending on [Wireless func.] and [Firing
group] setting details.

[Flash exposure compensation]

The same amount of flash exposure compensation is set for the built-in flash and all
external flash units.

[ exp. comp.]
Enables you to apply flash exposure compensation to the built-in flash.

[ exp. comp.]
The same amount of flash exposure compensation is set for all external flash units.

FE Lock

You can lock the flash exposure by pressing the < > button when [Flash mode] is set to
[E-TTL II].

251
 Wireless Flash Photography With Manually Set Flash
Output

Available when [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash]. Available flash output options (such
as [ Flash output] and [Group A output]) vary depending on [Wireless func.] setting
details (see below).

[Wireless func.: ]
[Firing group: All]
The same manual flash output is set for all external flash units.

[Firing group: (A:B)]

Receivers can be assigned to flash group A or B, and you can set the flash output of
each.

[Wireless func.: + ]
[Firing group: All and ]
Enables you to set the flash output separately for external flash units and the built-in
flash.

[Firing group: (A:B) ]

Receivers can be assigned to flash group A or B, and you can set the flash output of
each. You can also set the flash output for the built-in flash.

252
Shooting and Recording

This chapter describes shooting and introduces menu settings on the shooting ([ ]) tab.

• Still Photo Shooting

• Movie Recording

253
Still Photo Shooting

to the right of page titles indicates functions only available in Creative Zone modes.

• Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting (Viewfinder Shooting)

• Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting (Live View Shooting)
• Image Quality
• Still Image Aspect Ratio
• Image Review Time
• Shutter Release Without Card
• Lens Aberration Correction
• Exposure Compensation/AEB Setting
• ISO Speed Settings (Still Photos)
• Auto Lighting Optimizer
• Highlight Tone Priority
• Metering Timer (Live View Shooting)
• White Balance Settings
• White Balance Correction
• Color Space
• Picture Style Selection
• Picture Style Customization
• Picture Style Registration
• Noise Reduction Features
• Appending Dust Delete Data
• Anti-Flicker Shooting
• Continuous AF (Live View Shooting)
• Lens Electronic MF
• AF-Assist Beam Firing
• General Still Photo Shooting Precautions

254
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting (Viewfinder
Shooting)

Shooting 1

(1) Image quality

(2) Still img aspect ratio

(3) Review duration
(4) Release shutter without card

(5) Lens aberration correction

(6) Flash control

Shooting 2

(1) Expo.comp./AEB

(2) ISO speed settings

(3) Auto Lighting Optimizer

(4) Highlight tone priority

(5) Metering mode

255
 Shooting 3

(1) White balance

(2) Custom White Balance

(3) WB Shift/Bkt.

(4) Color space

(5) Picture Style

Picture Style Selection

Picture Style Customization

Picture Style Registration

Shooting 4

(1) Long exp. noise reduction

(2) High ISO speed NR

(3) Dust Delete Data

(4) Live View shoot.

(5) Anti-flicker shoot.

256
 Shooting 5

(1) Lens electronic MF

(2) AF-assist beam firing

In Basic Zone modes, the following screens are displayed.

Shooting 1

(1) Image quality

(2) Review duration
(3) Release shutter without card
(4) Flash control

257
 Shooting 2

(1) Retain Creative Assist data

(2) Live View shoot.
(3) AF-assist beam firing

258
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting (Live View Shooting)

Shooting 1

(1) Image quality

(2) Still img aspect ratio
(3) Review duration
(4) Release shutter without card

(5) Lens aberration correction

(6) Flash control

Shooting 2

(1) Expo.comp./AEB

(2) ISO speed settings

(3) Auto Lighting Optimizer

(4) Highlight tone priority

(5) Metering mode

(6) Metering timer

259
 Shooting 3

(1) White balance

(2) Custom White Balance

(3) WB Shift/Bkt.

(4) Color space

(5) Picture Style

Picture Style Selection

Picture Style Customization

Picture Style Registration

Shooting 4

(1) Long exp. noise reduction

(2) High ISO speed NR

(3) Dust Delete Data

(4) Touch Shutter

260
 Shooting 5

(1) AF method
(2) Eye Detection AF
(3) Continuous AF

(4) Lens electronic MF

(5) AF-assist beam firing
(6) MF peaking settings

In Basic Zone modes, the following screens are displayed. Note that
available setting items vary by shooting mode.

Shooting 1

(1) Image quality

(2) Still img aspect ratio
(3) Review duration
(4) Release shutter without card
(5) Flash control

261
 Shooting 2

(1) Retain Creative Assist data

(2) Touch Shutter

Shooting 3

(1) AF method
(2) Eye Detection AF
(3) Continuous AF
(4) AF-assist beam firing
(5) MF peaking settings

262
Image Quality

RAW Images

Guide to Image Quality Settings

Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting

1. Select [ : Image quality].

2. Set the image quality.

To select the RAW quality, turn the < > dial, and to select the
JPEG quality, press the < >< > keys.
Press < > to set it.

Caution

Number of shots available as indicated by [****] on the image quality setting screen
always applies to a setting of [3:2], regardless of the actual aspect ratio setting
( ).

263
 Note

If [–] is set for both the RAW image and JPEG image, will be set.
If you select both RAW and JPEG, each time you shoot, the image will be recorded
simultaneously to the card as both a RAW and JPEG image at your specified
image qualities. The two images will be recorded with the same file numbers (file
extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR3 for RAW).
is in (Fine) quality.
Meaning of image quality icons: RAW, Compact RAW, JPEG, Fine,
Normal, Large, Medium, Small.

264
 RAW Images

RAW images are raw data from the image sensor that are recorded to the card digitally as
or (smaller than ) files, depending on your selection.
RAW images can be processed using [ : RAW image processing] ( ) to save them as
JPEG images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can process the RAW image
to create any number of JPEG images with various processing conditions.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW images. You can
make various adjustments to images depending upon how they will be used and can
generate JPEG or other types of images reflecting the effects of those adjustments.

Note

To display RAW images on a computer, consider using the EOS application Digital
Photo Professional (hereafter DPP).
Older versions of DPP Ver.4.x do not support display, processing, editing, or other
operations with RAW images captured by this camera. If a previous version of DPP
(Ver.4.x) is installed, obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon
website to update it ( ), which will overwrite the previous version. Similarly, DPP
Ver.3.x or earlier does not support display, processing, editing, or other operations
with RAW images captured by this camera.
Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW images taken
with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software manufacturer.

Guide to Image Quality Settings

See Specifications for details on file size, number of shots available, maximum burst, and
other estimated values.

265
 Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting

The approximate maximum burst is shown as a number or other indication at the top of the
shooting screen in Live View shooting and in the lower right of the viewfinder in viewfinder
shooting.

Note

When the maximum burst indicator is “99” in Live View shooting, you can shoot 99
shots or more continuously. The value starts decreasing once it reaches 98 or less.
When the maximum burst indicator is “9” in viewfinder shooting, you can shoot 9
shots or more continuously. The value starts decreasing once it reaches 8 or less.
“ ” display in the viewfinder indicates that the internal buffer memory is full
and shooting will stop temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum
burst will increase. After all captured images have been written to a card, you can
once again shoot at the maximum burst listed in Specifications.

266
Still Image Aspect Ratio

You can change the image's aspect ratio.

1. Select [ : Still img aspect ratio].

2. Set the aspect ratio.

Select an aspect ratio, then press < >.

JPEG images
The images will be recorded with the set aspect ratio.

RAW images
The images will always be recorded in the [3:2] aspect ratio. The selected aspect ratio
information is added to the RAW image file, which enables Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software) to generate an image with the same aspect ratio as set at the time of
shooting when you process RAW images with this software.

267
 Aspect Ratio Aspect Ratio Aspect Ratio

4:3 16:9 1:1

In viewfinder
shooting

In Live View shooting

Note

RAW images shot at an aspect ratio of [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] are displayed during
playback with lines indicating the respective aspect ratio, but these lines are not
recorded in the image.

268
Image Review Time

Set to [Hold] to keep the captured image displayed after you shoot, or set to [Off] if you
prefer not to have shots displayed.

1. Select [ : Review duration].

2. Set a time option.

Note

When [Hold] is set, images are displayed until the time set in [ : Auto power off]
elapses.

269
Shutter Release Without Card

You can set the camera not to shoot unless there is a card in the camera. The default
setting is [Enable].

1. Select [ : Release shutter without card].

2. Select [Disable].

270
Lens Aberration Correction

Peripheral Illumination Correction

Distortion Correction

Digital Lens Optimizer

Chromatic Aberration Correction

Diffraction Correction

Vignetting, image distortion, and other issues may be caused by lens optical characteristics.
The camera can compensate for these phenomena by using [Lens aberration correction].

1. Select [ : Lens aberration correction].

2. Select an item.

271
 3. Select [Enable].

Confirm that the name of the attached lens and [Correction data
available] are displayed (except when [Diffraction correction] is set).
If [Correction data not available] or [ ] is displayed, see Digital Lens
Optimizer.

Peripheral Illumination Correction

Vignetting (dark image corners) can be corrected.

Caution

Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.

The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.

Note

The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction amount
that applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
Peripheral illumination is corrected automatically in Basic Zone modes when
correction data is registered on the camera.

272
 Distortion Correction

Distortion (image warping) can be corrected.

Caution

To correct distortion, the camera captures a narrower image area than the area
seen when shooting, which crops the image a little and slightly lowers the apparent
resolution.
Setting distortion correction may change the angle of view slightly.
When you magnify images, distortion correction is not applied to the images
displayed.
Distortion correction is not applied in movie recording.
Images with distortion correction applied will not have the Dust Delete Data ( )
appended. Also, the AF point may be displayed out of position, relative to the time
of shooting.

Note

Distortion is corrected automatically when < > mode is set to < > mode
with correction data registered on the camera.

273
 Digital Lens Optimizer

Various aberrations from lens optical characteristics can be corrected, along with diffraction
and low-pass filter-induced loss of resolution.
If [Correction data not available] or [ ] is displayed by [Digital Lens Optimizer], you can
use EOS Utility to add the lens correction data to the camera. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.

Caution

Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the

effects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture Style
sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable] as needed before shooting.
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
For movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not appear. (Correction is not
possible.)

Note

Enabling [Digital Lens Optimizer] will correct both chromatic aberration and
diffraction when you shoot, although these options are not displayed.
Digital Lens Optimizer is applied automatically in Basic Zone modes with correction
data registered on the camera.

274
 Chromatic Aberration Correction

Chromatic aberration (color fringing around subjects) can be corrected.

Note

[Chromatic aberr corr] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is enabled.

275
 Diffraction Correction

Diffraction (loss of sharpness caused by the aperture) can be corrected.

Caution

Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the

effects of correction.
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
For movie recording, [Diffraction correction] will not appear. (Correction is not
possible.)

Note

“Diffraction correction” corrects diffraction as well as degraded resolution from the

low-pass filter and other factors. Therefore, correction is effective even at an
aperture close to the open aperture.
[Diffraction correction] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to
[Enable].

Caution

General precautions for lens aberration correction

Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, distortion
correction, and diffraction correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already
taken.
When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
Magnifying the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will not
be recorded.
The correction amount will be less (except for diffraction correction) if the lens used
does not have distance information.

276
 Note

General notes for lens aberration correction

The effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens used and
shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern depending on the
lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
If the correction is difficult to discern, magnifying and checking the image after
shooting is recommended.
Corrections can be applied even when an extender or life-size converter is
attached.
If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera, the result
will be the same as when the correction is set to [Disable] (except for diffraction
correction).
If necessary, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual as well.

277
Exposure Compensation/AEB Setting

You can capture three images at different shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
as adjusted by the camera. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.

1. Select [ : Expo.comp./AEB].

2. Set the AEB range.

Turn the < > dial to set the AEB range (1). Press the < >< >
keys to set the exposure compensation level.
Press < > to set it.
When you press the shutter button halfway, the AEB range will be
displayed in the viewfinder.

278
 3. Take the picture.

Standard exposure

Decreased exposure

Increased exposure

Three bracketed shots are taken, according to the specified drive

mode, in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and
increased exposure.

AEB will not be automatically canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step 2 to

turn off the AEB range display.

Caution

Exposure compensation in AEB may be less effective with [ : Auto Lighting

Optimizer] ( ) set to an option other than [Disable].

Note

If the drive mode is set to [ ], press the shutter button three times for each shot.
When [ ] or [ ] is set and you hold down the shutter button completely, the
three bracketed shots will be taken consecutively and the camera will automatically
stop shooting. When [ ] or [ ] is set, three consecutive shots are captured
after a delay of 10 or 2 sec. When set to [ ], three times the specified number of
shots are taken in continuous shooting.
You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
AEB is not available with flash, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, Creative filter, or bulb
shooting.
AEB is canceled automatically if the power switch is set to < > or when the
flash is fully charged.

279
ISO Speed Settings (Still Photos)

[AUTO] ISO Speed

Maximum [AUTO] ISO Speed

Set the ISO speed (image sensor's sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level.
In Basic Zone modes, ISO speed is set automatically.
For details on ISO speed in movie recording, see ISO Speed in Movie Recording.

1. Press the < > button ( ).

280
2. Set the ISO speed.

Select the ISO speed with the < >< > keys or the < > dial
while watching the viewfinder or screen, then press < >.
ISO speed can be set within ISO 100–25600.
With [AUTO] selected, the ISO speed will be set automatically ( ).

To specify [AUTO] when setting [ISO speed] in [ : ISO speed

settings] (shown above), you can press the < > button.

281
ISO speed guide

Low ISO speeds reduce image noise but may increase the risk of camera/subject shake
or reduce the area in focus (shallower depth of field), in some shooting conditions.
High ISO speeds enable low-light shooting, a larger area in focus (deeper depth of field),
and longer flash range but may increase image noise.

Note

Can also be set on the [ISO speed] screen in [ : ISO speed settings].
Under [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if [ISO expansion] is set to [1:Enable], “H”
(equivalent to ISO 51200) can also be selected ( ).

Caution

If [ : Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced], ISO 100/125/160

and “H” (equivalent to ISO 51200) cannot be selected ( ).
Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier. Long
exposures may also cause irregular colors in the image.
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding) may
become noticeable.
If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject, overexposure may
result.
When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise, such as a
combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long exposure, images may
not be recorded properly.
As “H” (equivalent to ISO 51200) is an expanded ISO speed setting, noise (dots of
light, banding, etc.) and irregular colors will be more noticeable, and the resolution
will be lower compared to the standard setting.

282
[AUTO] ISO Speed

If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], the actual ISO speed setting will be displayed in the
viewfinder or on the screen when you press the shutter button halfway.
When [AUTO] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-stop increments. However, the
ISO speed is actually set in finer increments. Therefore, in the image's shooting
information ( ), you may find an ISO speed such as ISO 125 or ISO 640 displayed as
the ISO speed.

283
 Maximum [AUTO] ISO Speed

For ISO Auto, you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within ISO 400–25600.

1. Select [ : ISO speed settings].

2. Select [Max for Auto].

Select [Max for Auto], then press < >.

3. Select the ISO speed.

Select the ISO speed, then press < >.

284
Auto Lighting Optimizer

Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or contrast is too
low or high.

1. Select [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer].

2. Set a correction option.

Caution

Noise may increase and apparent resolution may change, under some shooting
conditions.
If the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and results are not at your
preferred brightness, set to [Low] or [Disable].
If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure compensation or flash
exposure compensation to darken the exposure, the image may still come out
bright. If you want a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].
Maximum burst is lower with [High]. Image recording to the card also takes longer.

285
 Note

In step 2, if you press the < > button and remove the checkmark [ ] for
[Disable during man expo] setting, [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] can also be
set even in < > mode.

286
Highlight Tone Priority

You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.

1. Select [ : Highlight tone priority].

2. Set an option.

[Enable]: Improves gradation in highlights. The gradation between the

grays and highlights becomes smoother.
[Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed highlights even more than
[Enable], under some shooting conditions.

Caution

Noise may increase slightly.

The available ISO range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speeds cannot be set.
[Enhanced] is not available when recording movies.
With [Enhanced], results in some scenes may not look as expected.

287
Metering Timer (Live View Shooting)

You can set how long the metering timer runs (which determines the duration of exposure
display/AE lock) after it is triggered by an action such as pressing the shutter button halfway.

1. Select [ : Metering timer].

2. Set a time option.

288
White Balance Settings

White Balance

[ ] Auto White Balance

[ ] Custom White Balance

[ ] Color Temperature

White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the Auto [ ]
(Ambience priority) or [ ] (White priority) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If
natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to
match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

1. Press the < > button.

2. Select an option.

289
 (Approx.)

Display Mode Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)

Auto: Ambience priority

3000–7000
Auto: White priority

Daylight 5200

Shade 7000

Cloudy, twilight, sunset 6000

Tungsten light 3200

White fluorescent light 4000

Flash Automatically set*

Custom 2000–10000

Color temp. 2500–10000

* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function. Otherwise, it will be
fixed to approx. 6000K.

White Balance

To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of lighting. Digital
cameras determine white from the color temperature of lighting and, based on this, apply
image processing to make color tones look natural in your shots.

290
 [ ] Auto White Balance

With [ ], you can slightly increase the intensity of the image's warm color cast when
shooting a tungsten-light scene.
If you select [ ], you can reduce the intensity of the image's warm color cast.

1. Select [ : White balance].

2. Select [ ].

With [ ] selected, press the < > button.

3. Select an option.

291
 Caution

Precautions when set to [ ]

The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of the
picture may not be reduced.
When using flash, the color tone will be the same as with [ ].

292
 [ ] Custom White Balance

With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for the specific light
source of the shooting location. Always follow these steps under the light source you will use
when shooting.

1. Shoot a white object.

Aim the camera at a plain white subject, so that white fills the screen.

Focus manually and shoot with the standard exposure set for the white
object.

You can use any of the white balance settings.

2. Select [ : Custom White Balance].

3. Import the white balance data.

Press the < >< > keys to select the image captured in step 1,
then press < >.
Select [OK] to import the data.

293
 4. Select [ : White balance].

5. Select [ ].

Caution

If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure, a
correct white balance may not be obtained.
These images cannot be selected: Images captured with Picture Style set to
[Monochrome], images with a Creative filter applied before or after shooting,
cropped images, or images shot with another camera.
Images that cannot be used in the setting may be displayed.

Note

Instead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray chart or standard 18%
gray reflector (commercially available).

294
[ ] Color Temperature

1. Select [ : White balance].

2. Set the color temperature.

Select [ ].
Turn the < > dial to set the desired color temperature, then press
< >.
The color temperature can be set from approx. 2500K to 10000K in
100K increments.

Caution

When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set the white
balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.
If you set [ ] to the reading taken with a commercially available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate for the
difference between the color temperature meter's reading and the camera's color
temperature reading.

295
White Balance Correction

White Balance Correction

White Balance Auto Bracketing

White balance correction has the same effect as using a commercially available color
temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter.

White Balance Correction

1. Select [ : WB Shift/Bkt.].

296
 2. Set the white balance correction.

Sample setting: A2, G1

Press the < > < > or < >< > keys to move the “■” mark to
your preferred position.
B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for green. White
balance is corrected in the direction you move the mark.
On the right of the screen, [Shift] indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
Pressing the < > button will cancel all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press < > to exit the setting.

Note

One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds of a color

temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color temperature used to
indicate values such as the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)

297
 White Balance Auto Bracketing

White balance bracketing (WB Bkt.) enables you to capture three images at once with
different color tones.

Set the white balance bracketing amount.

B/A bias ±3 levels

In step 2 for White Balance Correction, when you turn the < > dial, the “■” mark on
the screen will change to “■ ■ ■” (3 points).
Turning the dial clockwise sets the B/A bracketing, and turning it counterclockwise sets
the M/G bracketing.
On the right, [Bracket] indicates the bracketing direction and correction amount.
Pressing the < > button will cancel all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press < > to exit the setting.

Caution

During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
be lower.
Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record the image to
the card.

Note

The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard white balance,
2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard white balance, 2. Magenta
(M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance
bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance bracketing, a total of
nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
In Live View shooting, the white balance icon blinks when white balance bracketing
has been set.
“Bracket” stands for bracketing.

298
Color Space

The range of reproducible colors is called the “color space.” For normal shooting, sRGB is
recommended.

1. Select [ : Color space].

2. Set a color space option.

Adobe RGB

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial uses.
Recommended when using equipment such as Adobe RGB-compatible monitors or DCF 2.0
(Exif 2.21 or later) compatible printers.

Note

File names of still photos shot in the Adobe RGB color space begin with “_”.
The ICC profile is not appended. For the descriptions about the ICC profile, refer to
the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (EOS software).
In Basic Zone, [sRGB] is set automatically.

299
Picture Style Selection

Picture Style Characteristics

Symbols

Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics effectively
matching your photographic expression or the subject.

1. Press the < > button.

The Picture Style selection screen will appear.

2. Select a Picture Style.

Select a Picture Style, then press < >.

The Picture Style will be set.

Note

You can also make your selection from [ : Picture Style].

300
Picture Style Characteristics

[ ] Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid
for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.

Note

If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.

[ ] Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. Suitable for most scenes.

[ ] Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up portraits.
Skin tone can be adjusted by changing [Color tone] as described in Settings and
Effects.

[ ] Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Effective for impressive
landscapes.

[ ] Fine Detail
For detailed rendering of fine subject contours and subtle textures. The colors will be
slightly vivid.

[ ] Neutral
Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors and subdued
images with modest brightness and color saturation.

[ ] Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a subject that is captured
in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be adjusted to match the subject's
colorimetrical color. For subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.

301
[ ] Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.

Caution

Color images cannot be recovered from JPEG images shot with the
[Monochrome] Picture Style.

Note

You can also set the camera to display < > in the viewfinder for when
[Monochrome] is set ( ).

[ ] User Def. 1–3

You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a Picture Style file, etc.
and adjust it as desired ( ). With any User Defined Picture Style that has not yet been
registered, pictures will be taken with the same characteristics settings as with the
default settings of [Auto].

302
 Symbols

The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness], or [Threshold] for
[Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other parameters. The numbers indicate the values
for these settings specified for the respective Picture Style.

Sharpness

Strength

Fineness

Threshold

Contrast

Saturation

Color tone

Filter effect (Monochrome)

Toning effect (Monochrome)

Caution

During movie recording, an asterisk “*” will be displayed for both [Fineness] and
[Threshold] for [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be applied to
movies.

303
Picture Style Customization

Settings and Effects

[ ] Monochrome Adjustment

You can customize any Picture Style by changing it from the default settings. For details on
customizing [Monochrome], see [ ] Monochrome Adjustment.

1. Press the < > button.

The Picture Style selection screen will appear.

2. Select a Picture Style.

Select the Picture Style to adjust, then press the < > button.

3. Select an option.

For details on settings and effects, see Settings and Effects.

304
4. Set the effect level.

Press the < > button to save the adjusted setting and return to
the Picture Style selection screen.
Any settings you change from default values are displayed in blue.

305
 Settings and Effects

Sharpness

Strength 0: Weak outline emphasis 7: Strong outline emphasis

Fineness*1 1: Fine 5: Grainy

Threshold*2 1: Low 5: High

Contrast –4: Low contrast +4: High contrast

Saturation –4: Low saturation +4: High saturation

Color tone –4: Reddish skin tone +4: Yellowish skin tone

* 1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the number, the finer the
outlines that can be emphasized.
* 2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast between the subject
and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the more the outline will be emphasized when the
contrast difference is low. However, noise tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.

Note

For movie recording, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot be set
(not displayed).
By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can restore the parameter settings of the
respective Picture Style to their defaults.
To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted Picture Style,
then shoot.

306
 [ ] Monochrome Adjustment

[ ] Filter effect

With a filter effect applied to a monochrome image, you can make white clouds or green
trees stand out more.

Filter Sample Effects

N:None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.

Ye:Yellow The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look crisper.

Or:Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more brilliant.

R:Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter.

G:Green Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look crisper and brighter.

Note

Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.

307
[ ] Toning effect

By applying a toning effect, you can create a monochrome image in the selected color.
Effective when you want to create memorable images.

308
Picture Style Registration

You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape], adjust it as desired,
and register it under [User Def. 1]–[User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture
Styles with different settings.
Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility (EOS software, )
can also be modified here.

1. Press the < > button.

The Picture Style selection screen will appear.

2. Select a user-defined style number.

Select a number from [User Def. 1] to [User Def. 3], then press the
< > button.

3. Press < >.

With [Picture Style] selected, press < >.

309
4. Select the base Picture Style.

Select the base Picture Style.

Also select styles this way when adjusting styles registered to the
camera with EOS Utility (EOS software).

5. Select an item.

310
 6. Set the effect level.

For details, see Picture Style Customization.

Press the < > button to save the adjusted setting and return to
the Picture Style selection screen.
The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
Blue style names indicate that you have changed the settings from
default values.

Caution

If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the base
Picture Style will clear the parameter settings of the previously registered User
Defined Picture Style.
All [User Def. *] settings are reset when [Clear all camera settings] in [ : Clear
settings] ( ) is performed.

Note

To shoot with a registered Picture Style, select the registered [User Def. *], then
shoot.
Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera, refer to the
EOS Utility Instruction Manual ( ).

311
Noise Reduction Features

Long Exposure Noise Reduction

High ISO Speed Noise Reduction

Long Exposure Noise Reduction

For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and banding) typical of long
exposures can be reduced.

1. Select [ : Long exp. noise reduction].

312
 2. Set a reduction option.

[ ] Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This setting
is effective enough in most cases.

[ ] Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The
[Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with the
[Auto] setting.

Caution

With [Auto] or [Enable] set, noise reduction after you shoot may take as long as
exposure for the shot.
Images may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto]
setting.
With [Enable] set, shooting long exposures during Live View display will stop Live
View display (and prevent your next shot) until the camera is finished with noise
reduction, indicated by [BUSY] display. The Live View display will not appear until
the noise reduction is complete. (You cannot take another picture.)

313
 High ISO Speed Noise Reduction

This function reduces the noise generated in the image. This function is especially effective
when shooting at high ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the
darker parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced.

1. Select [ : High ISO speed NR].

2. Set the level.

[ ] Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Applies the noise reduction with higher image quality than [High]. For a single photo,
four shots are taken continuously and aligned and merged automatically into a single
JPEG image.
If the image quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you cannot set [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction].

314
 Caution

[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] Precautions

If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the noise
reduction effect may become smaller.
Be careful about camera shake in handheld shots. Using a tripod is recommended.
If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.
Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
If the subject's brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are taken,
irregular exposure in the image may result.
After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card after
performing noise reduction and merging the images. “buSY” and “BUSY” appear in
the viewfinder and on the screen, respectively, as images are processed. Shooting
is not possible until processing is finished.
[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available with bulb shooting, shooting with
AEB or white balance bracketing, shooting RAW or RAW+JPEG images, or with
features such as long exposure noise reduction.
Flash photography is not possible. Note that the AF-assist beam may be fired,
depending on the [ : AF-assist beam firing] setting.
[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available (not displayed) when recording
movies.
The camera automatically switches to [Standard] if you set the power switch to
< >, replace the battery or card, or switch to Basic Zone modes, bulb
exposure, or movie recording.

315
Appending Dust Delete Data

Preparation

Dust Delete Data Acquisition

Dust Delete Data Appending

Dust Delete Data used to erase dust spots can be appended to images in case sensor
cleaning leaves dust on the sensor. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software) to erase the dust spots automatically.

Preparation

Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.

Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
Set the lens's focus mode switch to < > and set the focus to infinity (∞).

316
Dust Delete Data Acquisition

1. Select [ : Dust Delete Data].

317
2. Select [OK].

After the automatic self-cleaning of the sensor is performed, a message

will appear. Although there will be a mechanical sound of the shutter
during the cleaning, no picture is taken.

318
3. Shoot a plain white object.

Shoot with a plain white object (such as a new sheet of white paper)
filling the screen, at a distance of 20–30 cm (0.7–1.0 ft.).

Since the image will not be saved, the data can still be obtained even if
there is no card in the camera.

When the picture is taken, the camera will start collecting the Dust
Delete Data. When the Dust Delete Data is obtained, a message will
appear.
If the data is not obtained successfully, an error message will appear.
Check the information in Preparation, select [OK], and shoot again.

319
 Dust Delete Data Appending

Once acquired, Dust Delete Data is appended to still photos captured after that point.
Acquiring Dust Delete Data before shooting is recommended.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase dust spots
automatically, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.
File size is essentially unaffected by Dust Delete Data appended to images.

Caution

If the object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and affect
the accuracy of the dust deletion with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software).
Dust Delete Data is not added to shots taken under the following conditions.
• Captured in [ ] (< > mode) shooting
• Captured in [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] (< > mode) shooting
• Captured with [Distortion correction] in [ : Lens aberration correction] set
to [ON]

320
Anti-Flicker Shooting

Uneven exposure and color may result if you shoot at fast shutter speeds under flickering
light sources such as fluorescent lights, due to uneven vertical exposure. Anti-flicker
shooting enables viewfinder shooting at moments when exposure and colors are less
affected by flickering.

1. Select [ : Anti-flicker shoot.].

2. Select [Enable].

3. Take the picture.

321
 Caution

When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the shutter-
release time lag may become longer. Also, the continuous shooting speed may
become slower, and the shooting interval may become irregular.
Not applied to mirror lockup shots, Live View shooting, or movie recording.
Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected. Also, if the
flickering frequency of the light source changes during continuous shooting, effects
of the flicker cannot be reduced.
In the < > or < > mode, if the shutter speed changes during continuous
shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at different shutter
speeds, the color tone may become inconsistent. To avoid inconsistent color tone,
shoot in < > or < > mode at a fixed shutter speed.
Color tone of captured images may vary between [Enable] and [Disable].
Shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed may change when you start
shooting with AE lock.
If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in the image,
flicker may not be properly detected.
Flicker reduction may not be possible under special lighting.
Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected result may not
be obtained even if you use this function.

Note

Taking test shots in advance is recommended.

When you shoot with flicker reduction, [ ] will light up. If [ ] does
not appear in the viewfinder, set [Flicker detection] in [ : Viewfinder display] to
[Show] ( ). Under a light source that does not flicker or with no flicker detected,
[ ] will not be displayed.
Even if you set [ : Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Disable], with [Flicker detection] set
to [Show], [ ] in the viewfinder will blink to warn you if the camera meters
under a flickering light source.
In Basic Zone, [ ] will not be displayed, but the effects of flicker will be
reduced when you shoot.
The expected result may not be obtained for wireless flash photography.

322
Continuous AF (Live View Shooting)

This function keeps subjects generally in focus in Live View shooting. The camera is ready
to focus immediately when you press the shutter button halfway.

1. Select [ : Continuous AF].

2. Select [Enable].

Caution

Enabling this function reduces the number of shots available, because the lens is
driven continuously and battery power is consumed.

323
Lens Electronic MF

For EF or EF-S lenses equipped with electronic manual focusing, you can specify how
manual focus adjustment is used with One-Shot AF.

1. Select [ : Lens electronic MF].

2. Select an option.

Disable after One-Shot AF

After the AF operation, manual focusing adjustment is disabled.

Enable after One-Shot AF

You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep holding down the
shutter button halfway.

Caution

For details on your lens's manual focus specifications, refer to the lens instruction
manual.

324
AF-Assist Beam Firing

You can specify to use the AF-assist beam of the built-in flash or a Speedlite in viewfinder
shooting.

1. Select [ : AF-assist beam firing].

2. Select an option.

[ ] Enable
Enables firing of the AF-assist beam, when needed.
Raise the built-in flash if you will use it to fire the AF-assist beam.

[ ] Disable
Disables firing of the AF-assist beam. Set if you prefer not to fire the AF-assist beam.

[ ] Enable external flash only

Enables firing of the AF-assist beam when needed, only when external Speedlites are
used.

[ ] IR AF assist beam only

Enables infrared AF-assist beam firing by external Speedlites equipped with this feature,
when these flash units are attached.

325
 Caution

If an external Speedlite's [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to

[1:Disabled], the AF-assist beam will not be fired.

Note

The AF-assist beam of an attached EX series Speedlite equipped with an LED light
will fire as needed from the Speedlite's LED light in Live View shooting when you
specify [Enable] or [Enable external flash only].

326
General Still Photo Shooting Precautions

Both Viewfinder and Live View Shooting

In Live View Shooting

Information Display in Live View Shooting

Both Viewfinder and Live View Shooting

Caution

Image quality
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding) may
become noticeable.
Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image.

327
 In Live View Shooting

Caution

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.

Image quality
Frequent shooting over an extended period may cause the camera's internal
temperature to rise and affect image quality. When you are not shooting, always
turn off the camera.
If you shoot a long exposure while the camera's internal temperature is high, image
quality may decline. Stop shooting and wait a few minutes before shooting again.

White [ ] and red [ ] icons

If the camera's internal temperature rises from extended shooting or use in hot
environments, a white [ ] or red [ ] icon will appear.
The white [ ] icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will decline. Stop
shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down.
Shooting at low ISO speeds instead of high speeds is recommended when the
white [ ] icon is displayed.
The red [ ] icon indicates that shooting will soon end automatically. Shooting will
not be possible again until the camera cools down internally, so stop shooting
temporarily or turn off the camera and let it cool down a while.
Shooting in hot environments over extended periods will cause the white [ ] or
red [ ] icon to appear sooner. When you are not shooting, always turn off the
camera.
If the camera's internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot with a high
ISO speed or long exposure may decline even before the white [ ] icon is
displayed.

Shooting results
In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture value will be displayed in red. If
you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out as desired.
Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured with the
image area of the normal view.

328
Images and display
Under low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reflect the
brightness of the captured image.
Under low light, noise may be noticeable in image display even at low ISO speeds,
but there will be less noise in your shots, because image quality varies between
display and captured images.
The screen or exposure value may flicker if the light source (lighting) changes. In
this case, stop shooting temporarily and resume under the light source you will use.
Pointing the camera at different direction may momentarily prevent correct display
of brightness. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting.
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear black
on the screen. However, the actual captured image will correctly show the bright
area.
In low light, if you set [ : Disp. brightness] to a bright setting, noise or irregular
colors may appear in the image. However, the noise or irregular colors will not be
recorded in the captured image.
When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more pronounced
than in the actual image.

Custom Functions
Some Custom Functions are not available (some settings have no effect).

Lens and flash

If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer switch
to < >, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press the
shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may
decrease the number of available shots depending on the shooting conditions.
When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is
recommended that you set the Image Stabilizer switch to < >.
With EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when using (super)
telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the second half of
2011.
FE lock will not work if the built-in flash is used. FE lock and modeling flash will not
work if an external Speedlite is used.

Note

With HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display images on a
television ( ). Note that no sound will be output.

329
 Information Display in Live View Shooting

For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see Live View Shooting Screen.

Note

When [ ] is displayed in white, it indicates that the image is displayed at the

brightness level closely matching that of the actual image to be captured.
If the [ ] icon is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a brightness
that differs from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light conditions.
However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting. Note that the
noise may be more noticeable than the actual image recorded.
Exposure simulation may not be performed under some shooting settings. The
[ ] icon and histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be displayed on
the screen at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be properly
displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.

330
Movie Recording

For movie recording, set the power switch to < >.

to the right of page titles indicates functions only available in Creative Zone modes
(< >, < >, < >, or < >).

Caution

When switching from still photo shooting to movie recording, check the camera
settings again before recording movies.

• Tab Menus: Movie Recording

• Movie Recording
• HDR Movies
• Creative Filters
• Movie Recording Size
• Digital Zoom
• Movie Self-Timer
• Sound Recording
• Movie Digital IS
• Time-Lapse Movies
• Video Snapshots
• Movie Servo AF
• Other Menu Functions
• General Movie Recording Precautions

331
Tab Menus: Movie Recording

Shooting 1

(1) Movie rec. size

(2) Digital zoom
(3) Movie self-timer
(4) Sound recording
(5) Movie digital IS

(6) Lens aberration correction

Shooting 2

(1) Time-lapse movie

(2) Remote control
(3) Video snapshot

332
 Shooting 3

(1) Exposure comp.

(2) ISO speed settings

(3) Auto Lighting Optimizer

(4) Highlight tone priority

(5) Auto slow shutter

(6) Metering timer

333
 Shooting 4

(1) White balance

(2) Custom White Balance

(3) WB correction

(4) Picture Style

Picture Style Selection

Picture Style Customization

Picture Style Registration

(5) HDMI info disp

Shooting 5

(1) AF method
(2) Movie Servo AF
(3) Eye Detection AF

(4) Lens electronic MF

(5) MF peaking settings

334
Movie Recording

Autoexposure Movie Recording

Manual Exposure Movie Recording

ISO Speed in <M> Mode

Available Shutter Speeds

Still Photo Shooting

Information Display (Movie Recording)

Autoexposure Movie Recording

Autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene's current brightness.

1. Set the power switch to < >.

After the sound of the reflex mirror moving, the image appears on the
screen.

2. Set the Mode dial to a mode other than < >, < >, or < >.

335
3. Focus on the subject.

Before recording a movie, focus with AF ( ) or manual focus ( ).

By default, [ : Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] so that the camera
always keeps focusing ( ).
When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method.

336
4. Record the movie.

Press the < > button to start recording a movie.

You can also start recording a movie by tapping [ ] on the screen.

Note

[ ] is not displayed under the following settings.

• [Video snapshot] is set to [Enable]

• [Time-lapse movie] is set to an option other than [Disable]

• In < > mode (movie)

• In < > mode (HDR movie)

While the movie is being recorded, the [ REC] icon will be displayed
in the upper right of the screen.
Sound is recorded by the built-in microphone ( ).
To stop recording the movie, press the < > button again.
You can also stop recording a movie by tapping [ ] on the screen.

337
ISO speed in Basic Zone modes

The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100–12800.

ISO speed in < >, < >, and < > modes

The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100–12800. The maximum varies
depending on the [Max for Auto] setting in [ : ISO speed settings] ( ).
Under [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1:Enable],
[H(25600)] can also be selected for [Max for Auto].

Caution

When the < > mode is set, HDR movie recording takes effect ( ).
Even if you set the < > or < > mode, movie recording with priority given to
shutter speed or aperture value cannot be performed. Autoexposure recording
takes effect as in the < > mode.

Note

In < > mode, a scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed in
the upper left of the screen ( ).
In Creative Zone modes, you can press the < > button ( ) to lock the exposure
(AE lock). After applying AE lock during movie recording, you can cancel it by
pressing the < > button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the < >
button.)
Exposure compensation in Creative Zone modes can be set in a range of up to ±3
stops.
ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture value are not recorded in movie Exif
information.
With autoexposure movie recording (except in time-lapse movie recording), this
camera supports the Speedlite's function to turn on the LED light automatically in
low-light conditions. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the EX series
Speedlite equipped with an LED light.

338
 Manual Exposure Movie Recording

You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed for movie recording.

1. Set the power switch to < >.

2. Set the Mode dial to < >.

3. Set the ISO speed.

Press the < > button.

The ISO speed setting screen is displayed.
Set with the < > or < > dial.

339
4. Set the shutter speed and aperture value.

Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level
indicator.
To set the shutter speed (1), turn the < > dial, and to set the
aperture value (2), turn the < > dial.

5. Focus and record the movie.

The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for Autoexposure Movie

Recording.

340
 Caution

During movie recording, avoid changing the shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO
speed, which may record changes in the exposure or create more noise at high
ISO speeds.
When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less smooth the
subject's movement will look.
If you change the shutter speed while recording under fluorescent or LED lighting,
image flicker may be recorded.

Note

With ISO Auto, exposure compensation can be set in a range of ±3 stops ( ).

When ISO Auto is set, you can press the < > button to lock the ISO speed. After
locking the ISO speed during movie recording, you can cancel it by pressing the
< > button. (ISO speed lock is maintained until you press the < > button.)
If you press the < > button and recompose the shot, you can see the exposure
level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to when the < >
button was pressed.
With the camera ready to shoot in the < > mode, you can display the histogram
by pressing the < > button.

ISO Speed in <M> Mode

You can set the ISO speed manually or select [ ]. For details on ISO speed, see ISO
Speed in Movie Recording.

341
 Available Shutter Speeds

Shutter speed in < > mode can be set in a range of 1/4000–1/8 sec.

Caution

The available shutter speeds will differ for time-lapse movie recording ( ).

Still Photo Shooting

Still photos cannot be taken during movie recording. To take still photos, stop the movie
recording and perform viewfinder shooting or Live View shooting.

342
 Information Display (Movie Recording)

For details on the icons on the movie recording screen, see Movie Recording Screen.

Caution

Precautions for movie recording

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
If you record something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result.
If [ ] or [ ] is set and the ISO speed or aperture value changes during
movie recording, the white balance may also change.
If you record a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image may
flicker.
If you perform AF with a USM lens during movie recording in low light, horizontal
banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type of noise may occur if
you focus manually ( ) with certain lenses equipped with an electronic focusing
ring.
Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming
during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure
changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio level, or loss of focus.
Large aperture values may delay or prevent accurate focusing.
Performing AF by pressing the shutter button halfway during movie recording may
cause the following kinds of issues: significant temporary loss of focus, recording of
changes in movie brightness, temporary stopping of movie recording, or recording
of mechanical lens sounds.
Avoid covering the built-in microphones ( ) with your fingers or other objects.
Also see General Movie Recording Precautions.
If necessary, also see General Still Photo Shooting Precautions.

343
 Note

Notes for movie recording

Each time you record a movie, a new movie file is created on the card.
The movie's field of view coverage for recording 4K, Full HD, and HD movies is
approx. 100%.
To enable starting or stopping movie recording by pressing the shutter button
completely, you can set [Fully-press] for [ : Shutter btn function for movies] to
[Start/stop mov rec].
Stereo sound is recorded by the camera's built-in microphones ( ).
Any external microphones such as Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold
separately) connected to the camera's external microphone IN terminal are used
instead of the build-in microphones ( ).
Most external microphones equipped with a 3.5 mm mini-jack can be used.
With EF lenses, focus preset during movie recording is available when using
(super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the
second half of 2011.
YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the BT.709 color space are used for 4K, Full
HD, and HD movies.

344
HDR Movies

You can record high dynamic range movies that retain detail in highlights of high-contrast
scenes.

1. Set the Mode dial to < >.

2. Record an HDR movie.

Record the movie in the same way as normal movie recording ( ).

345
 Caution

Since multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, certain parts of the
movie may look distorted. This is more noticeable in shots affected by camera
shake, so consider using a tripod. Note that even if a tripod is used for recording,
afterimages or noise may become more noticeable, compared to normal playback,
when the HDR movie is played back frame-by-frame or in slow motion.
Not available for Movie digital zoom, video snapshots, time-lapse movies, or Movie
digital IS.

Note

The recording size is (NTSC) or (PAL).

ISO speed is set automatically when you record HDR movies.

346
Creative Filters

In < > (creative filters) mode, you can record movies with filter effects applied.

1. Set the Mode dial to < >.

2. Press the < > button ( ).

The Quick Control screen will appear.

3. Select [ ].

Use the < > < > keys to select [ ] (Shooting mode) in the upper
left, then press < >.

347
4. Select a filter effect.

Use the < >< > keys to select a filter effect ( ), then press
< >.
The image is shown with the filter effect applied.
For [Miniature effect movie], move the AF point into position for
focusing. Move the scene frame if the AF point is outside of it, so that
the AF point is aligned with it.

5. Adjust the filter effect level.

Press the < > button and select the icon below [Movie self-timer].
Use the < >< > keys to adjust the effect, then press < >.
When setting up [Miniature effect movie], select the playback speed.

6. Record the movie.

348
 Caution

A magnified view is not available.

No histogram is displayed.
Not available for Movie digital zoom, video snapshots, time-lapse movies, or Movie
digital IS.

Note

The recording size is [ ]/[ ] (NTSC) or [ ] (PAL).

In Creative Zone modes, Creative filter settings are available from the Quick
Control screen ( ).

349
 Creative Filter Characteristics

Dream
Applies a soft, dreamy, otherworldly appearance. Gives the movie a soft look overall,
blurring the periphery of the screen. You can adjust the blurry areas along the screen
edges by adjusting the filter effect.

Old Movies
Creates an atmosphere like an old film by adding wavering, scratches, and flickering
effects to the image. The top and bottom of the screen are masked in black. You can
modify the wavering and scratch effects by adjusting the filter effect.

Memory
Creates the atmosphere of a distant memory. Gives the movie a soft look overall,
reducing brightness of the periphery of the screen. You can modify the overall saturation
and the dark areas along the screen edges by adjusting the filter effect.

Dramatic B&W
Creates an atmosphere of dramatic realism with high-contrast black and white. You can
adjust the graininess and black-and-white effect by adjusting the filter effect.

Miniature effect movie

You can record movies with a miniature (diorama) effect.
To make the scene frame movable, press the < > button in step 4 (or tap [ ] in the
lower right of the screen), so that it changes color. To center the frame again, press the
< > button. To switch between vertical and horizontal scene frame orientation, tap
[ ] in the lower left of the screen. Switching scene frame orientation is also possible
with the < >< > keys when in horizontal orientation and < > < > keys when
in vertical orientation. To confirm the position of the scene frame, press < >. In step 5,
set the playback speed to [5x], [10x], or [20x] before recording. [1-point AF] is used as
the AF method, focusing on subjects centered in the white frame. The white frame is
hidden during recording.

Speed and playback time (for a 1-minute movie)

Speed Playback Time

5× Approx. 12 sec.

10× Approx. 6 sec.

20× Approx. 3 sec.

350
 Caution

Subjects such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered with smooth gradation
and may have noise or irregular exposure or colors.

[ ]
Sound is not recorded.
Movie Servo AF will not function.
Editing is not available for movies with a playback time less than 1 sec. ( ).

351
Movie Recording Size

Image Size

4K Movie Recording

Frame Rate (fps: frame per second)

Compression Method

Movie Recording Format

Cards That Can Record Movies

Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB

Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute

Movie Recording Time Limit

In [ : Movie rec. size], you can set the image size, frame rate, and compression method.
The movie will be recorded as an MP4 file.
Note that the frame rate will be switched automatically according to the [ : Video system]
setting ( ).

352
Image Size

[ ] 3840×2160
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.

[ ] 1920×1080
The movie will be recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality. The aspect ratio is
16:9.

[ ] 1280×720
The movie is recorded in High-Definition (HD) quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.

Caution

If you change the [ : Video system] setting, also set [ : Movie rec. size] again.
Normal playback of 4K and / movies may not be possible on other
devices, because playback is processing-intensive.
Apparent resolution and noise vary depending on movie recording quality.

Note

Movies cannot be recorded in VGA quality.

353
4K Movie Recording

Recording 4K movies requires a high-performance card. For details, see Cards That
Can Record Movies.
Recording 4K movies greatly increases the processing load, which may cause the
camera's internal temperature to increase faster or become higher than for regular
movies. If a red icon appears during movie recording, the card may be hot, so
stop recording the movie and let the camera cool down before removing the card.
(Do not remove the card immediately.)
From a 4K movie, you can select any frame to save as an approx. 8.3 megapixel
(3840×2160) JPEG still image to the card ( ).

Frame Rate (fps: frame per second)

[ ] 59.94 fps/[ ] 29.97 fps/[ ] 23.98 fps

For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico,
etc.).

[ ] 50.00 fps/[ ] 25.00 fps

For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).

354
Compression Method

[ ] IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording.

[ ] IPB (Light)
Since the movie is recorded at a bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard), the file size will
be smaller than with IPB (Standard) and the playback compatibility will be higher. This
will make the possible recording time longer than with IPB (Standard) (with a card
having the same capacity).

Movie Recording Format

[ ] MP4
All movies you record with the camera are recorded as movie files in MP4 format (file
extension “.MP4”).

355
 Cards That Can Record Movies

For details on cards that can record at each level of movie recording quality, see Card
performance requirements.
Test cards by recording a few movies to make sure they can record correctly at your
specified size ( ).

Caution

Format cards before recording 4K movies ( ).

If you use a slow-writing card when recording movies, the movie may not be
recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading
speed, the movie may not be played back properly.
When recording movies, use high-performance cards with a writing speed
sufficiently higher than the bit rate.
When movies cannot be recorded normally, format the card and try again. If
formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the card manufacturer's
website, etc.

Note

To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera
before recording movies is recommended ( ).
To check the card's writing/reading speed, refer to the card manufacturer's website,
etc.

356
 Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB

Even if you record a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep recording without interruption.

Using SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera

If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will format it in FAT32.
With a FAT32-formatted card, if you record a movie and the file size exceeds 4 GB, a
new movie file will be created automatically.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play back each movie file individually.
Movie files cannot be played back automatically in consecutive order. After the movie
playback ends, select the next movie and play it back.

Using SDXC cards formatted with the camera

If you use the camera to format an SDXC card, the camera will format it in exFAT.
When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the file size exceeds 4 GB during movie
recording, the movie will be saved as a single file (rather than being split into multiple
files).

Caution

When importing movie files exceeding 4 GB to a computer, use either EOS Utility
or a card reader ( ). It may not be possible to save movie files exceeding 4 GB if
you attempt this using standard features of the computer's operating system.

357
 Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute

For details on file sizes and the recording time available at each movie recording size, see
Estimated recording time, movie bit rate, and file size.

Movie Recording Time Limit

The maximum recording time per movie is 29 min. 59 sec. Once 29 min. 59 sec. is reached,
recording automatically stops. You can start recording a movie again by pressing the < >
button (which records the movie as a new file).

358
Digital Zoom

With the recording size set to [ ]/[ ] (NTSC) or [ ] (PAL), you can
shoot with approx. 3–10× digital zoom.

1. Set the Mode dial to a mode other than < > or < >.

2. Select [ : Digital zoom].

3. Select an option.

Select the amount to zoom, then press < >.

359
 4. Use digital zoom.

Press the < >< > keys.

The digital zoom bar will appear.
Press the < > key to zoom in or press the < > key to zoom out.
When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus with
[1-point AF] (fixed at center).
To cancel digital zoom, set [Disable] in step 2.

Caution

Using a tripod to prevent camera shake is recommended.

Time-lapse movies, Creative filters, and Movie digital IS are not available.
The maximum ISO speed will be ISO 6400.
A magnified view is not available.
Since Movie digital zoom processes the image digitally, the image will look grainier
at higher magnifications. Noise, dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable.
The scene icon will not be displayed.
Also see Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult.

360
Movie Self-Timer

Movie recording can be started by the self-timer.

1. Select [ : Movie self-timer].

2. Select an option.

3. Record the movie.

After you tap [ ] or press the < > button, the camera displays
number of seconds left before recording and beeps.

Note

To cancel the self-timer, either tap the screen or press < >.

361
Sound Recording

Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level

Wind Filter

Attenuator

External Microphone

You can record movies while recording sound with the built-in stereo microphone or an
external stereo microphone. You can also freely adjust the sound-recording level.
Use [ : Sound recording] to set sound recording functions.

Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level

Auto

The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level control will take effect
automatically in response to the sound level.

Manual

You can adjust the sound-recording level as needed.

Select [Rec. level] and press the < >< > keys while looking at the level meter to
adjust the sound-recording level. Look at the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the
level meter sometimes lights up on the right of the “12” (–12 dB) mark for the loudest
sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound will be distorted.

Disable

Sound will not be recorded.

362
 Wind Filter

Set to [Auto] to reduce wind noise automatically when there is wind outdoors. Only activated
when the camera's built-in microphone is used. When the wind filter function takes effect,
part of the low bass sounds will also be reduced.

Attenuator

Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Set [Sound rec.] to
[Enable] if distortion occurs when set to [Auto] or [Manual].

363
 External Microphone

If an external microphone equipped with a miniature stereo plug (3.5 mm diameter) is

connected to the camera's external microphone IN terminal, the external microphone will be
given the priority. Using a microphone such as Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold
separately) is recommended.

Caution

Sounds from Wi-Fi operations may be captured with built-in or external

microphones. During sound recording, using the wireless communication function
is not recommended.
When connecting an external microphone to the camera, make sure the plug is
fully inserted.
The camera's built-in microphone will also record mechanical sounds of the lens or
sounds of camera/lens operations if AF operations are performed or the camera is
operated during movie recording. In this case, using an external microphone may
reduce these sounds. If the sounds are still distracting with an external microphone,
it may be more effective to remove the external microphone from the camera and
position it away from the camera and lens.
Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera's
external microphone IN terminal.

Note

In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] are [On] or
[Off]. Set to [On] for automatic adjustment of the recording level.
Audio is also output when the camera is connected to televisions via HDMI, except
when [Sound rec.] is set to [Disable].
The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be adjusted.
Sound is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.

364
Movie Digital IS

The camera's Movie digital IS feature reduces camera shake as movies are recorded. Movie
digital IS can provide effective stabilization even when your lens is not equipped with Image
Stabilizer. When using a lens equipped with Image Stabilizer, set the lens's Image Stabilizer
switch to < >.

1. Select [ : Movie digital IS].

2. Select an option.

Disable ( )
Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.

Enable ( )
Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnified.

Enhanced ( )
Compared to when [Enable] is set, stronger camera shake can be corrected. The image
will be more magnified.

365
 Caution

Movie digital IS will not function when the lens's optical Image Stabilizer switch is
set to < >.
With a lens whose focal length is longer than 800 mm, Movie digital IS will not
function.
Movie digital IS cannot be set in < > or < > mode or when Movie digital
zoom, time-lapse movie, or Creative filter is set.
The wider the angle of view, the more effective the image stabilization will be. The
narrower the angle of view, the less effective the image stabilization will be.
When using a TS-E lens, fish-eye lens, or non-Canon lens, setting Movie digital IS
to [Disable] is recommended.
Effects of Movie digital IS are not applied to images during magnified display.
Since Movie digital IS magnifies the image, the image looks more grainy. Noise,
dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable.
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur noticeably
(the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the effects of the Movie digital
IS.
When Movie digital IS is set, the size of AF points will also change.
When using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.
Certain lenses do not support this function. For details, refer to the Canon website.

366
Time-Lapse Movies

Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically to create a 4K or Full
HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject changes in a much shorter
period of time than the actual time it took. It is effective for a fixed-point observation of
changing scenery, growing plants, celestial motion, etc.
Time-lapse movies are recorded in MP4 format at the following quality:
(NTSC)/ (PAL) in 4K recording, and (NTSC)/
(PAL) in Full HD recording.
Note that the frame rate will be switched automatically according to the [ : Video system]
setting ( ).

1. Set the Mode dial to a mode other than < > or < >.

2. Select [ : Time-lapse movie].

3. Select [Time-lapse].

367
4. Select a scene.

Select a scene to suit the shooting situation.

For greater freedom when setting the shooting interval and number of
shots manually, select [Custom].

5. Set the shooting interval.

Select [Interval/shots].
Select [Interval] (sec.). Use the < >< > keys to set a value, then
press < >.
Refer to [ : Time required] (1) and [ : Playback time] (2) to set
the number.

When [Custom] is set

Select [Interval] (min.:sec.).

Press < > to display < >.

Use the < >< > keys to set a value, then press < >. (Returns
to < >.)

Select [OK] to register the setting.

368
6. Set the number of shots.

Select [No. of shots]. Use the < >< > keys to set a value, then
press < >.
Refer to [ : Time required] and [ : Playback time] to set the
number.

When [Custom] is set

Select the digit.

Press < > to display < >.

Use the < >< > keys to set a value, then press < >. (Returns
to < >.)

Check that [ : Playback time] is not displayed in red.

Select [OK] to register the setting.

Caution

If the card does not have enough free space to record the set
number of shots, [Playback time] will be displayed in red.
Although the camera can continue shooting, the shooting will stop
when the card becomes full.

If the movie file size exceeds 4 GB with the [No. of shots] settings
and the card is not formatted in exFAT ( ), [Playback time] will
be displayed in red. If you keep recording in this condition and the
movie file size reaches 4 GB, the time-lapse movie recording will
stop.

369
 Note

With [Scene *], available intervals and numbers of shots are

restricted, to suit the type of scene.

For details on cards that can record time-lapse movies, see Card
performance requirements.

If the number of shots is set to 3600, the time-lapse movie will be

approx. 2 min. in NTSC and approx. 2 min. 24 sec. in PAL.

7. Select the desired movie recording size.

(3840×2160)
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
The frame rate is 29.97 fps ( ) for NTSC and 25.00 fps ( ) for
PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 ( ) format with ALL-I ( )
compression.

(1920×1080)
The movie will be recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality. The
aspect ratio is 16:9.
The frame rate is 29.97 fps ( ) for NTSC and 25.00 fps ( ) for
PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 ( ) format with ALL-I ( )
compression.

370
8. Configure [Auto exposure].

Fixed 1st frame

When taking the first shot, metering is performed to set the exposure
automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the first
shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related
settings for the first shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.

Each frame
Metering is also performed for each subsequent shot to set the
exposure automatically to match the brightness. Note that if functions
such as Picture Style and white balance are set to [Auto], they will be
set automatically for each subsequent shot.

Caution

With [Interval] set to less than 3 sec. and [Auto exposure] set to
[Each frame], if the brightness differs greatly from the preceding
shot, the camera may not shoot at the set interval.

With [Auto exposure] set to [Each frame], ISO speed, shutter

speed, and aperture value may not be recorded in the time-lapse
movie Exif information in some shooting modes.

371
 9. Configure [Screen auto off].

Disable
Even during time-lapse movie recording, the image will be displayed.
(The screen turns off only at the time of shooting.) Note that the screen
will turn off when approx. 30 min. elapse after the shooting started.

Enable
Note that the screen will turn off when approx. 10 sec. elapse after the
shooting started.

Note

During time-lapse movie recording, you can press the < >
button to turn on/off the screen.

10. Set the beeper.

Select [Beep as img taken].

If [Disable] is set, the beeper will not sound for shooting.

372
11. Check the settings.

(1) Time required

Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the set
interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.

(2) Playback time

Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the movie)
when creating the time-lapse movie in 4K movie or Full HD movie from the
still photos taken with the set intervals.

12. Close the menu.

Press the < > button to turn off the menu screen.

373
13. Record the time-lapse movie.

Press the < > button and check again the “Time required (1)” and
“Interval (2)” displayed on the screen.

Press the < > button completely to start recording the time-lapse
movie.

AF will not work during time-lapse movie recording.

“ REC” is displayed in the upper right of the screen as the time-lapse

movie is recorded.

When the set number of shots are taken, the time-lapse movie
recording ends.

To cancel recording time-lapse movies, set [Time-lapse] to [Disable].

374
 Caution

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
[Time-lapse movie] cannot be set to an option other than [Disable] when the
camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable, or when an HDMI
cable is connected.
Movie Servo AF will not function.
If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie may not be
displayed properly (may differ from that of the resulting movie).
Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie recording. Zooming the lens may
cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or the lens aberration
correction not to function properly.
When recording a time-lapse movie under a flickering light, noticeable image
flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be recorded.
Images displayed as time-lapse movies are recorded may look different from the
resulting movie (in details such as inconsistent brightness from flickering light
sources, or noise from a high ISO speed).
When recording a time-lapse movie under low light, the image displayed during
shooting may look different from what is actually recorded in the movie. In such
cases, the [ ] icon will blink.
If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving subject during
time-lapse movie recording, the image may look extremely distorted.
During time-lapse movie recording, auto power off will not take effect. Also, you
cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function settings, play back images,
etc.
Sound is not recorded for time-lapse movies.
If the shutter speed exceeds the shooting interval (such as for long exposures), or if
a slow shutter speed is set automatically, the camera may not be able to shoot at
the set interval. Shooting may also be prevented by shooting intervals nearly the
same as the shutter speed.
If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may shorten the
recording time of the created time-lapse movie.
If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to the
shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be taken
with the set intervals.
The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel the time-
lapse movie recording after only one shot is taken, it will be recorded as a movie
file.
If you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable and use EOS
Utility (EOS software), set [ : Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If an option other
than [Disable] is selected, the camera cannot communicate with the computer.

375
During time-lapse movie recording, the lens's Image Stabilizer will not operate.
If the power switch is set to < >, time-lapse movie recording will be terminated
and the setting will be switched to [Disable].
Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
The following operations cancel standby for time-lapse movie recording and switch
the setting to [Disable].
• Selecting either [Clean now ] in [ : Sensor cleaning] or [Clear all camera
settings] in [ : Clear settings]
• Setting the Mode dial to < > or < >
If you start time-lapse movie recording while the white [ ] ( ) icon is displayed,
the image quality of the time-lapse movie may deteriorate. It is recommended that
you start time-lapse movie recording after the white [ ] icon disappears (camera's
internal temperature decreases).

Note

Using a tripod is recommended.

Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
The movie's field of view coverage for both the 4K and Full HD time-lapse movie
recording is approx. 100%.
To cancel the time-lapse movie recording in progress, press the < > button. The
time-lapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card.
If the time required for recording is more than 24 hours but not more than 48 hours,
“2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the number of days
will be indicated in 24-hour increments.
Even if the time-lapse movie's playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie file will still
be created. For [Playback time], “00'00"” will be displayed.
If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories (sold
separately) is recommended.
YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the BT.709 color space are used for 4K/Full
HD time-lapse movies.

376
 Note

You can use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) to start and stop the
time-lapse movie recording. Set [ : Remote control] to [Enable] beforehand.

With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1

• First, pair the BR-E1 with the camera ( ).

Camera Status/
Remote Control < > (Immediate Release) < > (Movie
Setting <2> (2-sec. Delay) Recording)

Shooting-ready Starts shooting

As set in the Shutter Button Function for
During time-lapse Movies setting Ends recording
movie recording

Guide to Time Available for Time-Lapse Movie Recording

For guidelines on how long you can record time-lapse movies (until the battery runs out),
see Time available for movie recording.

377
Video Snapshots

Configuring Video Snapshot Settings

Creating Video Snapshot Albums

Adding to an Existing Album

Record a series of short video snapshots, each a few seconds long, and the camera will
combine them to create a video snapshot album that shows these highlights of your trip or
event.
Video snapshots are available when the movie recording size is set to
(NTSC) / (PAL).
Video snapshot albums can also be played back with background music ( ).

Creating a Video Snapshot Album

Video snapshots 1, 2, and so on

Video snapshot album

Configuring Video Snapshot Settings

1. Set the Mode dial to a mode other than < >.

2. Specify [ : Video snapshot].

Select [Enable].

378
3. Specify [Album settings].

Select [Create a new album].

Read the message and select [OK].

4. Specify [Playback time].

Specify playback time per video snapshot.

5. Specify [Playback effect].

This setting determines how fast albums are played back.

379
6. Specify [Show confirm msg].

Select [Enable].

7. Check the required recording time.

The time required to record each video snapshot is indicated (1), based
on the playback time and effect.

8. Close the menu.

Press the < > button to close the menu.

A blue bar is displayed to indicate the recording time (2).

380
Creating Video Snapshot Albums

1. Record the first video snapshot.

Press the < > button, then record.

The blue bar indicating recording time gradually decreases, and after
the specified time elapses, recording stops automatically.
A confirmation message is displayed ( ).

2. Save as a video snapshot album.

Select [ Save as album].

The clip is saved as the first video snapshot in the album.

381
3. Record your next video snapshots.

Repeat step 1 to record the next video snapshot.

Select [ Add to album].
To create another album, select [ Save as a new album].
Repeat step 3 as needed.

4. Stop recording video snapshots.

Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable]. To return to normal movie

recording, be sure to specify [Disable].
Press the < > button to close the menu and return to normal
movie recording.

382
Options in steps 2 and 3
Option Description

Save as album (step 2) Saves the clip as the first video snapshot in an album.
Adds the current video snapshot to the album recorded most
Add to album (step 3) recently.
Creates a new album and saves the clip as the first video
Save as a new album (step 3) snapshot. This album file is different from the one recorded
most recently.
Playback video snapshot (steps 2, 3) Plays the video snapshot just recorded.

Do not save to album (step 2) Deletes the recently recorded video snapshot without saving
Delete without saving to album (step 3) it to an album. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.

Note

If you prefer to record the next video snapshot immediately, set [Show confirm
msg] under [ : Video snapshot] to [Disable]. This setting enables you to record
the next video snapshot immediately, without a confirmation message.

383
Adding to an Existing Album

1. Select [Add to existing album].

In step 3 of Configuring Video Snapshot Settings, select [Add to

existing album].

2. Select an existing album.

Use the < >< > keys to select an existing album, then press
< >.
Select [OK].
Some video snapshot settings will be updated to match settings of the
existing album.

3. Close the menu.

Press the < > button to close the menu.

The video snapshot recording screen is displayed.

384
 4. Record a video snapshot.

Record the video snapshot, referring to Creating a Video Snapshot

Album.

Caution

You cannot select an album shot with another camera.

Caution

General video snapshot precautions

No sound is recorded when you set [Playback effect] to [1/2x speed] or [2x
speed].
Recording time per video snapshot is only approximate. It may differ slightly from
the actual recording time indicated during playback, due to the frame rate and other
factors.

385
Movie Servo AF

With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously during movie
recording.

1. Select [ : Movie Servo AF].

2. Select [Enable].

When [Enable] is set:

• The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are not pressing
the shutter button halfway.
• To keep the focus at a specific position, or if you prefer not to record mechanical
sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop Movie Servo AF by tapping [ ] in
the lower left of the screen.
• When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie recording after operations
such as pressing the < > or < > button or changing the AF method,
Movie Servo AF will resume.

When [Disable] is set:

• Press the shutter button halfway or press the < > button to focus.

386
 Caution

Precautions when [Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable]

Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult

• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance to the camera.
• When shooting with a higher f/number.
• Also see Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult.
Since the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed, the
possible movie recording time ( ) will be shortened.
The camera's built-in microphone will also record mechanical sounds of the lens or
sounds of camera/lens operations if AF operations are performed or the camera is
operated during movie recording. In this case, using an external microphone may
reduce these sounds. If the sounds are still distracting with an external microphone,
it may be more effective to remove the external microphone from the camera and
position it away from the camera and lens.
Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.
During movie recording, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the camera is
moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie image may
momentarily expand or contract (change in image magnification).

387
Other Menu Functions

[ 1]

[ 2]

[ 3]

[ 4]

[ 1]

Lens aberration correction

Peripheral illumination and chromatic aberration can be corrected as you record movies.
For details on lens aberration correction, see Lens Aberration Correction.

388
[ 2]

Remote control

When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie recording using Wireless Remote
Control BR-E1 (sold separately). First, pair the BR-E1 with the camera ( ).

With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1

For normal movie recording, set the release timing/movie shooting switch to < >,
then press the release button.
For time-lapse movie recording, see Time-Lapse Movies.

389
[ 3]

ISO speed settings

• ISO speed
In [ ] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also select ISO Auto.

• Max for Auto

You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in movie recording in [ ] mode or in
[ ] mode with ISO Auto.
Under [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1:Enable],
[H(25600)] can also be selected for [Max for Auto].

Highlight tone priority

You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights as you record movies. For details on
Highlight tone priority, see Highlight Tone Priority.

Caution

[Enhanced] is not available (not displayed) when recording movies with [ :

Highlight tone priority] set.

390
 Auto slow shutter

You can choose whether to record movies that are brighter than when set to [Disable]
by automatically slowing the shutter speed under low light.
Available in [ ] recording mode. Applies when the frame rate of the movie recording
size is or .

• Disable
Enables you to record movies with smoother, more natural movement, less affected
by subject shake than when set to [Enable]. Note that under low light, movies may
be darker than when set to [Enable].

• Enable
Enables you to record brighter movies than when set to [Disable] by automatically
reducing the shutter speed to 1/30 sec. (NTSC) or 1/25 sec. (PAL) under low light.

Note

Setting to [Disable] is recommended when recording moving subjects under

low light, or when afterimages such as trails may occur.

391
[ 4]

HDMI info disp

You can configure information display for image output via an HDMI cable.

With info

The image, shooting information, AF points, and other information is shown on the other
device via HDMI. Note that the camera screen goes off. Recorded movies are saved to
the card.

Clean / output

HDMI output consists solely of 4K movies. Shooting information and AF points are also
displayed on the camera, but no image is recorded to the card. Note that Wi-Fi
communication is not available.

Clean / output

HDMI output consists solely of Full HD movies. Shooting information and AF points are
also displayed on the camera, but no image is recorded to the card. Note that Wi-Fi
communication is not available.

392
General Movie Recording Precautions

Caution

Red < > internal temperature warning icon

If the camera's internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie recording or
under a high ambient temperature, a red < > icon will appear.
The red < > icon indicates that movie recording will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera's
internal temperature decreases, so turn off the power and let the camera cool down
a while. Note that the time until movie recording stops automatically when the red
< > icon is displayed varies depending on shooting conditions.
Recording a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the red
< > icon to appear earlier. When you are not recording, always turn off the
camera.

Recording and image quality

If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer switch
to < >, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press the
shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may
shorten the total movie recording time depending on the shooting conditions. When
the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is
recommended that you set the Image Stabilizer switch to < >.
If the brightness changes as you record a movie with auto exposure, the movie
may appear to stop momentarily. In this case, record movies with manual
exposure.
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear black
on the screen. Movies are recorded almost exactly as they appear on the screen.
Image quality may be lower when recording movies under a combination of
conditions such as high ISO speeds, high temperatures, low shutter speeds, and
low light.
Recording movies over an extended period may cause the camera's internal
temperature to rise and affect image quality. Turn off the camera when possible if
you are not recording movies.
If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may decline or
playback may not be possible (even if the devices support MP4 format).

393
 If you use a card with a slow writing speed, an indicator may appear on the right
of the screen during movie recording. The indicator shows how much data has
not yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer
memory), and it increases more quickly the slower the card is. If the indicator (1)
becomes full, movie recording will stop automatically.

If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either not appear or the level
(if displayed) will hardly go upward. First, record a few test movies to see if the card
can write fast enough.
If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie recording stops
automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded properly.
If the card's writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator appears,
formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.

Audio restrictions
Note that the following restrictions apply to audio in movie recording.
• Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.
• When you play back movies in Windows, movie images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.

394
Playback

This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back captured still photos and
movies—and introduces menu settings on the Playback ([ ]) tab.

Caution

Normal display or selection on this camera may not be possible for images
captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that have been edited or
renamed on a computer.
Images that cannot be used with playback functions may be displayed.

• Tab Menus: Playback

• Image Playback
• Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)
• Magnified Image Display
• Movie Playback
• Editing a Movie's First and Last Scenes
• Frame Extraction from 4K Movies or 4K Time-Lapse Movies
• Playback on a TV Set
• Protecting Images
• Rotating Still Photos
• Changing Movie Orientation Information
• Erasing Images
• Print Ordering (DPOF)
• Photobook Set-up
• Creative Filters

• RAW Image Processing

• Creative Assist

• Quick Control RAW Processing

• Red-Eye Correction
• Creating Albums
• Cropping
• Resizing
• Rating Images
• Slide Show
• Setting Image Search Conditions
• Browsing Images with the Main Dial
• Histogram

395
• AF Point Display
• Resuming from Previous Playback
• HDMI HDR Output

396
Tab Menus: Playback

Playback 1

(1) Protect images

(2) Rotate stills
(3) Change mov rotate info
(4) Erase images
(5) Print order
(6) Photobook Set-up

397
 Playback 2

(1) Creative filters

(2) RAW image processing

(3) Creative Assist

(4) Quick Control RAW processing

(5) Red-eye correction
(6) Create album

Caution

[ : RAW image processing] and [ : Quick Control RAW processing]

are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.

Playback 3

(1) Cropping
(2) Resize
(3) Rating
(4) Slide show
(5) Set image search conditions
(6) Image jump w/

398
 Playback 4

(1) Histogram disp

(2) AF point disp.
(3) View from last seen
(4) HDMI HDR output

399
Image Playback

Single-Image Display

Shooting Information Display

Single-Image Display

1. Switch to playback.

Press the < > button.

The last image captured or played back is displayed.

400
2. Select an image.

To play back images starting with the most recent, turn the < > dial
counterclockwise. To play back images starting with the first captured
image, turn the dial clockwise.
Images can also be selected with the < >< > keys.
Each time you press the < > button, the display will change.

No information Basic information display

Shooting information display

3. Exit the image playback.

Press the < > button to exit the image playback and return to
shooting standby.

401
 Note

When RAW images shot with [ : Still img aspect ratio] set to an option other
than [3:2] ( ) are played back, frame lines indicating the image area will be
displayed.
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), only
the filtered images will be displayed.

Shooting Information Display

With the shooting information screen displayed ( ), you can press the < >< > keys to
change the information displayed at the bottom of the screen.

402
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)

1. Switch to the index display.

During image playback, press the < > button.

The 4-image index display will appear. The selected image is
highlighted with an orange frame. Pressing the < > button again
switches display from 9 images to 36, and then to 100. Pressing the
< > button switches display from 100 images to 36, 9, 4, and then
single-image display.

403
404
2. Select an image.

Turn < > or the < > dial to move the orange frame for image
selection.
Press < > in the index display to display the selected image in the
single-image display.

405
 Touch Playback

The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control playback.
Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones and similar devices. First,
press the < > button to prepare for touch playback.

Browse images

Jump display

Index display

Magnified view

406
 Note

You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one finger.

407
Magnified Image Display

1. Switch to magnified view.

During image playback, press the < > button.

The magnified view will appear. The magnified area position (1) will be
displayed in the lower right of the screen.
Each press of the < > button magnifies display.
Each press of the < > button reduces display. For index display
( ), press the < > button again after the final reduction.

408
2. Scroll the image.

Press the < > < > < >< > keys to scroll images vertically or
horizontally in the direction you press.
To cancel the magnified view, press the < > button or tap
[ ].

409
Movie Playback

1. Switch to playback.

Press the < > button.

2. Select a movie.

Use the < > dial to select the movie to play back.
In single-image display, the [ ] icon displayed in the upper left of
the screen indicates a movie.

In the index display, perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate

a movie. As movies cannot be played back from the index display,
press < > to switch to the single-image display.

410
3. In the single-image display, press < >.

4. Press < > to play back the movie.

(1) Speaker
The movie will start playing back.
You can pause playback and display the movie playback panel by
pressing < >. Press it again to resume the playback.
Pressing the < > key skips forward approx. 4 sec. during playback.
Similarly, pressing the < > key skips back approx. 4 sec.
You can also adjust the volume during movie playback by using the
< > < > keys.

411
Movie playback panel
Option Playback Operations

Play Pressing < > toggles between playback and stop.

Adjusts the slow motion speed with the < >< > keys. The slow motion
Slow motion
speed is indicated in the upper right of the screen.
Skip backward Skips backward approx. 4 sec. each time you press < >.
Displays the previous frame each time you press < >. Holding < > down
Previous frame
will rewind the movie.
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press < >. Holding < >
Next frame
down will fast forward the movie.
Skip forward Skips forward approx. 4 sec. each time you press < >.

Edit Displays the editing screen ( ).

Available when you play 4K or 4K time-lapse movies. Enables you to extract the
Frame Grab current frame and save it as a JPEG still image ( ).
Background music Plays back a movie with the selected background music ( ).

Playback position

mm' ss" Playback time (minutes:seconds)

Volume Use the < >< > keys to adjust the speaker volume ( ).

412
Movie Playback Panel (Video Snapshot Albums)
Option Playback Operations

Play Pressing < > toggles between playback and stop.

Adjusts the slow motion speed with the < >< > keys. The slow motion
Slow motion
speed is indicated in the upper right of the screen.
Previous clip Displays the first frame of the previous video snapshot.

Displays the previous frame each time you press < >. Holding < > down
Previous frame
will rewind the movie.
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press < >. Holding < >
Next frame
down will fast forward the movie.
Next clip Displays the first frame of the next video snapshot.

Erase clip Erases the current video snapshot.

Edit Displays the editing screen ( ).

Background music Plays back an album with the selected background music ( ).

Playback position

mm' ss" Playback time (minutes:seconds)

Volume Use the < >< > keys to adjust the speaker volume ( ).

Caution

Adjust the volume using television controls when the camera is connected to a
television for movie playback ( ), because volume cannot be adjusted with the
< > < > keys.
Movie playback may stop if the card's read speed is too slow or movie files have
corrupted frames.

Note

For details on the movie recording time available, see Time available for movie
recording.

413
Editing a Movie's First and Last Scenes

1. In single-image display, press < >.

The movie playback panel will appear.

2. On the movie playback panel, select [ ].

414
3. Specify the part to be edited out.

Select either [ ] (Cut beginning) or [ ] (Cut end).

Press the < >< > keys to go back or forward one frame (or video
snapshot) at a time. Keep holding down the < > key to fast forward.
After deciding which part to edit out, press < >. The portion indicated
by a line at the bottom of the screen will remain.

4. Check the edited movie.

Select [ ] to play back the edited movie.

To change the edited part, go back to step 3.
To cancel the editing, press the < > button.

415
 5. Save the image.

Select [ ] (1).
The save screen will appear.
To save it as a new file, select [New file]. To save it and overwrite the
original movie file, select [Overwrite].
Select [ ] (2) to save a compressed version of the file. 4K movies
are converted to Full HD movies before compression.
On the confirmation screen, select [OK] to save the edited movie and
return to the movie playback screen.

Caution

Because editing is performed in approx. 1 sec. increments (at the position indicated
by [ ] at the bottom of the screen), the actual position where movies are trimmed
may differ from your specified position.
Movies recorded with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
You cannot edit a movie when the camera is connected to a computer.
Compress and save is not available for movie recording sizes of
(NTSC) or (PAL).

Note

For instructions on editing video snapshot albums, see Creating Albums.

416
Frame Extraction from 4K Movies or 4K Time-Lapse
Movies

From 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies, you can select individual frames to save as
approx. 8.3 megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still images. This function is called “Frame Grab
(4K frame capture)”.

1. Switch to playback.

Press the < > button.

2. Select a 4K movie or 4K time-lapse movie.

Select with the < >< > keys.

On the shooting information screen ( ), 4K movies and 4K time-lapse
movies are indicated by an [ ] icon.
In index display, press < > to switch to single-image display.

3. In the single-image display, press < >.

The movie playback panel will appear.

417
4. Select a frame to grab.

Use the movie playback panel to select the frame to grab as a still
photo.
For movie playback panel instructions, see Movie Playback Panel.

5. Select [ ].

6. Save the image.

Select [OK] to save the current frame as a JPEG still image.

418
 7. Select the image to display.

Check the destination folder and image file number.

Select [View original movie] or [View extracted still image].

Caution

Frame grabbing is not possible with Full HD movies, Full HD time-lapse movies, or
with 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies from a different camera.

419
Playback on a TV Set

By connecting the camera to a television with an HDMI cable, you can play back the
captured still photos and movies on the television. Using the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) is recommended.
If the image does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [ : Video system] is
correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the video system of your
television).

1. Connect the HDMI cable to the camera.

With the plug's < HDMI MINI> logo facing the front of the camera,
insert it into the < > terminal.

2. Connect the HDMI cable to the television.

Connect the HDMI cable to the television's HDMI IN port.

3. Turn on the television and switch the television's video input to select
the connected port.

4. Set the camera's power switch to < >.

420
 5. Press the < > button.

The image will appear on the TV screen. (Nothing will be displayed on

the camera screen.)
Images are automatically displayed at optimal resolution for connected
televisions.

Caution

Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot be adjusted
with the camera.
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television,
turn off the camera and television.
Depending on the television, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
Do not connect any other device's output to the camera's < >
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Certain televisions may not display the images due to incompatibility.
It may take some time before images are displayed. To avoid delay, set [ : HDMI
resolution] to [1080p] ( ).
Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to a
television.

421
Protecting Images

Protecting a Single Image

Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected

Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can protect important images from being accidentally erased.

Protecting a Single Image

1. Select [ : Protect images].

2. Select [Select images].

3. Select an image.

Use the < >< > keys to select the image to be protected.

422
4. Protect the image.

Press < > to protect the selected image, after which it will be labeled
with a < > icon (1) at the top of the screen.
To cancel protection and clear the < > icon, press < > again.
To protect another image, repeat steps 3 and 4.

423
 Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for
a range to protect all the specified images at once.

1. Select [Select range].

Select [Select range] in [ : Protect images].

2. Specify the range of images.

Select the first image (start point).

Next, select the last image (end point). The images in the specified
range will be protected and the < > icon will appear.
To select another image to be protected, repeat step 2.

424
 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [ : Protect
images], all the images in the folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the selection, select [Unprotect all images in folder] or [Unprotect all
images on card].
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), the
display will change to [All found images] and [Unprotect all found].

• If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will
be protected.
• If you select [Unprotect all found], the protection of all the filtered images will be
canceled.

Caution

If you format the card ( ), the protected images will also be erased.

Note

Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera's erase function. To

erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection.
If you erase all the images ( ), only the protected images will remain. This is
convenient when you want to erase all unnecessary images at once.

425
Rotating Still Photos

You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.

1. Select [ : Rotate stills].

2. Select an image.

Use the < >< > keys to select the image to rotate.

3. Rotate the image.

Each time you press < >, the image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90°→270°→0°.
To rotate another image, repeat steps 2 and 3.
426
 Note

If you set [ : Auto rotate] to [On ] ( ) before taking vertical shots, you need
not rotate the image with this function.
If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image
playback, set [ : Auto rotate] to [On ].

427
Changing Movie Orientation Information

You can manually change movie orientation information (which determines which side is
up).

1. Select [ : Change mov rotate info].

2. Select a movie.

Use the < >< > keys to select a movie with orientation
information to change.

428
 3. Press < >.

As you watch the image orientation icon in the upper left of the screen,
press < > to specify which side is up.

Note

Orientation information of video snapshot albums cannot be changed.

Movies are played horizontally on the camera, regardless of the [ : Add
rotate info] setting ( ).

429
Erasing Images

Erasing a Single Image

Selecting ([ ]) Multiple Images to Erase Together

Specifying the Range of Images to Be Erased

Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase them in one
batch. Protected images ( ) will not be erased.

Caution

Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer

need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being
erased accidentally, protect them.

Erasing a Single Image

1. Select the image to be erased.

Press the < > button.

Select with the < >< > keys.

2. Press the < > button.

430
3. Erase the images.

JPEG or RAW images or movies

Select [Erase].

RAW+JPEG images

Select an item.

431
 Selecting ([ ]) Multiple Images to Erase Together

By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all those images at once.

1. Select [ : Erase images].

2. Select [Select and erase images].

3. Select an image.

Use the < >< > keys to select the image to be erased, then
press < >.
To select another image to be erased, repeat step 3.

432
4. Erase the image.

Press the < > button, then press [OK].

433
 Specifying the Range of Images to Be Erased

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for
a range to erase all the specified images at once.

1. Select [Select range].

2. Specify the range of images.

Select the first image (start point).

Next, select the last image (end point).

3. Press the < > button.

434
4. Erase the images.

Select [OK].

435
Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card

When [ : Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all
the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), the
display will change to [All found images].

• If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will
be erased.

Note

To erase all the images including protected images, format the card ( ).

436
Print Ordering (DPOF)

Setting Print Options

Selecting Images for Printing

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on the card
according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. You
can print multiple images in one batch or create a print order for a photofinisher.
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file number imprinting, etc.
The print settings will be applied to all the images specified for printing. (They cannot be set
individually for each image.)

Setting Print Options

1. Select [ : Print order].

2. Select [Set up].

437
3. Set the options as desired.

Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File No.].

Standard Prints one image on one sheet.

Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one
Index
Print type sheet.

Both Prints both the standard and index prints.

On
Date [On] imprints the recorded date of the captured image.
Off

On
File No. [On] imprints the file number.
Off

4. Exit the setting.

Press the < > button.

Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple] to order the images to be printed.

438
 Caution

If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both] setting
( ), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In this case, resize the
image ( ), then print the index print.
Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may not be
imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.
With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On] at the same
time.
When printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order specifications are set.
You cannot print in the specified print order if you extract just the images from the
card for printing.
Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to print the
images as you specified. When using a printer, refer to the printer's instruction
manual. When requesting service from a photofinisher, ask in advance.
Do not use this camera to configure print settings for images with DPOF settings
set up on another camera. All the print orders may be overwritten inadvertently.
Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the image type.

439
Selecting Images for Printing

Sel.Image

Select and specify the images one by one.

Press the < > button to save the print order to the card.

• Standard/Both

(1) Quantity
(2) Total images selected

Press < > to print a copy of the displayed image. By turning the < > dial, you
can set a print quantity of up to 99 copies.

• Index

(3) Checkmark
(4) Index icon

Press < > to add a checkmark [ ] to the box. The image will be included in the
index print.

440
Multiple

• Select range

Under [Multiple], select [Select range]. Selecting the first and last images of the
range marks all the images in the range with a checkmark [ ], and one copy of
each image will be specified for printing.

• All images in a folder

Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one copy of all the
images in the folder will be specified.
If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for all the
images in the folder will be canceled.

• All images on a card

If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the card will be
specified for printing.
If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all the images on
the card.
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ) and you
select [Multiple], the display will change to [Mark all found images] and [Clear all
found images].

All found images

If you select [Mark all found images], one copy of all the images filtered by the
search conditions will be specified for printing.
If you select [Clear all found images], all the print order of the filtered images will
be cleared.

441
 Caution

RAW images or movies cannot be specified for printing. Note that RAW images or
movies will not be specified for printing even if you specify all images with
[Multiple].
When using a PictBridge-compatible printer, do not specify more than 400 images
for one print order. If you specify more than this, the images may not all be printed.

442
Photobook Set-up

Specifying Images Individually

Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook

Specifying All Images in a Folder or Card

You can specify up to 998 images for printing in a photobook. When you use EOS Utility
(EOS software) to import images to a computer, the specified images for a photobook will be
copied to a dedicated folder. This function is useful for ordering photobooks online.

Specifying Images Individually

1. Select [ : Photobook Set-up].

2. Select [Select images].

443
3. Select the image to be specified.

Use the < >< > keys to select the image to be specified for a
photobook, then press < >.
To select other images to be specified for a photobook, repeat step 3.

444
 Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the range (start point to
end point) of images to be specified for a photobook at once.

1. Select [Multiple].

Under [ : Photobook Set-up], select [Multiple].

2. Select [Select range].

445
3. Specify the range of images.

Select the first image (start point).

Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.

446
 Specifying All Images in a Folder or Card

You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a photobook.

Under [ : Photobook Set-up], you can set [Multiple] to [All images in folder] or [All
images on card] to specify all the images in the folder or on the card for a photobook.
To cancel the selection, select [Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on card].
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ) and you
select [Multiple], the display will change to [All found images] and [Clear all found
images].

• If you select [All found images], all the found images will be specified for the
photobook.
• If you select [Clear all found images], all the photobook order of the filtered images
will be cleared.

Caution

RAW images or movies cannot be specified for the photobook. Note that RAW
images or movies will not be specified for the photobook even if you specify all
images with [Multiple].
Do not use this camera to configure photobook settings for images with photobook
settings set up on another camera. All the photobook settings may be overwritten
inadvertently.

447
Creative Filters

You can apply the following filter processing to an image and save it as a separate image:
Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect, Water painting effect, Toy camera
effect, and Miniature effect.

1. Select [ : Creative filters].

2. Select an image.

Use the < >< > keys to select an image, then press < >.
You can press the < > button to select the image using the index
display.

448
3. Select a filter effect ( ).

4. Adjust the filter effect.

Adjust the filter effect, then press < >.

For [Miniature effect], turn the < > or < > dial to move the
white frame enclosing the area to keep in sharper focus, then press
< >.

5. Save the image.

Select [OK].
Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK].
To apply filter processing to other images, repeat steps 2–5.

449
 Note

For images captured in RAW+JPEG shooting, filter processing is applied to the

RAW image, and the results are saved as a JPEG.
For RAW images captured at a specific aspect ratio, the resulting image is saved at
that aspect ratio after filter processing.
Images processed using the fish-eye effect filter will not have Dust Delete Data
( ) appended.

450
Creative Filter Characteristics

Grainy B/W

Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the contrast, you can change
the black-and-white effect.

Soft focus

Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change the degree of
softness.

Fish-eye effect

Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have barrel distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along the periphery of the
image changes. Also, because this filter effect magnifies the center of the image, the
apparent resolution at the center may degrade depending on the number of recorded
pixels, so set the filter effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.

Art bold effect

Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more three-dimensional.
By adjusting the effect, you can change the contrast and saturation. Note that subjects
such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may
look irregular or have significant noise.

Water painting effect

Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. By adjusting the effect,
you can change the color density. Note that night scenes or dark scenes may not be
rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.

Toy camera effect

Shifts colors to those typical of toy cameras and darkens the four corners of the image.
Color tone options can be used to change the color cast.

Miniature effect

Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks sharp. To switch
between vertical and horizontal orientation of the sharp area (white frame), press the
< >< > keys in step 4 (or tap [ ] on the screen).

451
RAW Image Processing

Magnified View

Processing Images with Specified Aspect Ratios

RAW Image Processing Options

You can process or images with the camera to create JPEG images. RAW
images are not affected, so different conditions can be applied to create JPEGs.
You can also use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW images.

1. Select [ : RAW image processing].

452
2. Select an item, then select images.

You can select multiple images to process at once.

Selecting images

Use the < >< > keys to select images to process, then press
< >.
Press the < > button.

453
Selecting range

Select the first image (start point).

Next, select the last image (end point).
Press the < > button.

454
3. Set the desired processing conditions.

Use shot settings

Images are processed using image settings at the time of capture.

Customize RAW processing

Select an item with the < >< >< >< > keys.
Turn the < > or < > dial to switch the setting.
Press < > to access the function setting screen.
To return to the image settings at the time of shooting, press the < >
button.

Comparison screen

You can switch between the [After change] and [Shot settings]
screens by pressing the < > button and turning the < > dial.

Items in orange on the [After change] screen have been modified

since the time of capture.

Press the < > button.

455
4. Save the image.

When using [Customize RAW processing], select [ ] (Save).

Read the message and select [OK].
To process other images, select [Yes] and repeat steps 2–4.

5. Select the image to display.

Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].

456
 Magnified View

You can magnify images displayed for [Customize RAW processing] by pressing the
< > button. Magnification varies depending on the [Image quality] setting. With the < >
< >< >< > keys, you can scroll around the magnified image.
To cancel the magnified view, tap [ ] or press the < > button.

Processing Images with Specified Aspect Ratios

JPEG images at the specified aspect ratio are created when you process RAW images shot
with [ : Still img aspect ratio] ( ) set to an option other than [3:2].

457
RAW Image Processing Options

Brightness adjustment

You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments.

White balance ( )

You can select the white balance. If you select [ ], you can select [Auto: Ambience
priority] or [Auto: White priority]. If you select [ ], you can set the color
temperature.

Picture Style ( )

You can select the Picture Style. You can adjust the sharpness, contrast, and other
parameters.

Auto Lighting Optimizer ( )

You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer.

High ISO speed NR ( )

You can set the noise reduction processing for high ISO speeds. If the effect is difficult
to discern, magnify the image ( ).

Image quality ( )

You can set the image quality when creating a JPEG image.

Color space ( )

You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera screen is not compatible
with Adobe RGB, the difference in the image will hardly be perceptible when either color
space is set.

458
 Lens aberr correction

• Peripheral illum corr ( )

A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the lens
characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be
displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image ( ) and check the
four corners. The peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera will be
less pronounced than that applied with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software) at maximum correction amount. If the effects of correction are not
apparent, use Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination
correction.

• Distortion correction ( )

Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. The image periphery will be trimmed in the
corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the sharpness with the
Picture Style's [Sharpness] parameter setting as necessary.

• Digital Lens Optimizer ( )

Correct lens aberration, diffraction, and low-pass filter-induced loss of sharpness by

applying optical design values. Selecting [Enable] corrects both chromatic
aberration and diffraction, although these options are not displayed.

• Chromatic aberr corr ( )

Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject's outline) due to the lens
characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be
displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image ( ).

• Diffraction correction ( )

The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image sharpness can be
corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is
difficult to discern, magnify the image ( ).

459
 Caution

Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the same results
as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
If you perform [Brightness adjustment], noise, banding, etc. may be intensified
with the effects of adjustment.
When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, noise may be intensified together with the
effects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture Style
sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable], as needed.
Dust Delete Data is not added to images when processing is performed with
[Distortion correction] set to [Enable].

Note

Lens correction data for lenses compatible with this feature is registered (stored) on
the camera.
The effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens used and
shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern depending on the
lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
For details on the correction data used with Digital Lens Optimizer, see Digital Lens
Optimizer.

460
Creative Assist

You can process RAW images by applying your preferred effects and saving as JPEGs.

1. Select [ : Creative Assist].

2. Select an image.

Use the < >< > keys to select images to process, then press
< >.

461
3. Select an effect.

Use the < >< > keys to select the effect.

By selecting [Preset] and pressing < >, you can choose [VIVID],
[SOFT], or other preset effects. [AUTO1], [AUTO2], and [AUTO3] are
effects recommended by the camera based on image conditions.

You can select effects such as [Brightness] or [Contrast] by pressing

< > and then using the < >< > keys.
Press < > when adjustment is finished.

462
 To reset the effect, press the < > button.
To confirm the effect, press the < > button.

4. Select [OK] to save the image.

463
Quick Control RAW Processing

You can select the type of RAW image processing performed from the Quick Control screen.

1. Select [ : Quick Control RAW processing].

2. Select an item.

Creative Assist

RAW processing that applies your preferred effect ( ).

RAW image processing

RAW processing according to conditions you specify ( ).

464
Red-Eye Correction

Automatically corrects relevant portions of images affected by red-eye. The image can be
saved as a separate file.

1. Select [ : Red-eye correction].

2. Select an image with the < >< > keys.

After image selection, either tap [ ] or press < >.

White frames are displayed around corrected image areas.

465
 3. Select [OK].

The image is saved as a separate file.

Caution

Some images may not be corrected accurately.

466
Creating Albums

1. Select [ : Create album].

2. Select an album to edit.

Press < > to add a checkmark [ ].

After selection, press the < > button.

467
3. Select an editing option.

Option Description
Use the < >< > keys to select a video snapshot to
Rearrange
move, then press < >. Use the < >< > keys to
video snapshots
move it, then press < >.
Use the < >< > keys to select a video snapshot to
Remove video delete, then press < >. Selected video snapshots are
snapshot labeled [ ]. To clear the selection and remove [ ], press
< > again.
Use the < >< > keys to select a video snapshot to
Play video
snapshot play, then press < >. Use the < >< > keys to
adjust the volume.

4. Finish editing.

Press the < > button when you are finished editing.
Select [ ] (Finish editing).

468
 5. Save the image.

To play an album with background music, use [Background music] to

select the music ( ).
To check your editing, select [Preview].
Selecting [Save] saves the edited album as a new album.

Caution

Video snapshot albums can only be edited once.

469
 Selecting Background Music

Albums and slideshows can be played with background music once you copy the music to
the card, using EOS Utility (EOS software).

1. Select [Background music].

Set [Background music] to [On].

2. Select the background music.

Use the < > < > keys to select the music, then press < >. For
[Slide show], you can select multiple tracks.

3. Listen to a sample.

To listen to a sample, press the < > button.

Use the < > < > keys to adjust the volume. Press the < >
button again to stop playback.

To delete the music, use the < >< > keys to select it, then press
the < > button.

Note

For instructions on copying background music to cards, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.

470
Cropping

You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image. Cropping an image is
possible only with JPEG images. Images shot in RAW cannot be cropped.

1. Select [ : Cropping].

2. Select an image.

Use the < >< > keys to select the image to crop.

471
3. Set the cropping frame.

Press < > to display the cropping frame.

The image area within the cropping frame will be cropped.

Resizing the cropping frame size

Use the < > or < > button to resize the cropping frame. The
smaller the cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will
look.

Changing the cropping frame aspect ratio and orientation

Use the < > dial to select < >. Press < > to change the
cropping frame's aspect ratio.

Moving the cropping frame

Use the < > < > < >< > keys to move the frame vertically or
horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image
area.

Correcting tilt
You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Use the < > dial to select < >,
then press < >. While checking tilt relative to the grid, turn the < >
dial (in 0.1° increments) or tap the left or right arrow (in 0.5°
increments) in the upper left of the screen to correct tilt. After
completing the tilt correction, press < >.

472
 4. Check the image area to be cropped.

Use the < > dial to select < >.

The image area to crop is displayed.

5. Save the image.

Use the < > dial to select < >.

Select [OK] to save the cropped image.
Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK].
To crop another image, repeat steps 2 to 5.

Caution

The position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on the angle
set for tilt correction.
Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
AF point display information ( ) and Dust Delete Data ( ) will not be appended
to the cropped images.

473
Resizing

You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a new image.
Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG / / images. JPEG and RAW images
cannot be resized.

1. Select [ : Resize].

2. Select an image.

Use the < >< > keys to select the image to resize.

474
 3. Select the desired image size.

Press < > to display the image sizes.

Select the desired image size (1).

4. Save the image.

Select [OK] to save the resized image.

Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK].
To resize another image, repeat steps 2 to 4.

Note

For details on image sizes of resized images, see Still photo pixel count.

475
Rating Images

Rating a Single Image

Rating by Specifying the Range

Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 ( / / / / ). This function is called rating.
* Rating images can help you organize them.

Rating a Single Image

1. Select [ : Rating].

2. Select [Select images].

476
3. Select the image to be rated.

Use the < >< > keys to select the image to rate.

4. Rate the image.

Press < >, and a blue highlight frame will appear as shown in the
screen shown above.
Use the < > < > keys to select a rating mark, then press < >.
When you append a rating mark to the image, the number beside the
set rating will increase by one.
To rate another image, repeat steps 3 and 4.

477
 Rating by Specifying the Range

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for
a range to rate all the specified images at once.

1. Select [Select range].

2. Specify the range of images.

Select the first image (start point).

Next, select the last image (end point).
A checkmark [ ] will be appended to all the images within the range
between first and last images.

3. Press the < > button.

478
4. Rate the images.

Turn the < > dial to select a rating mark, then select [OK].
All the images in the specified range will be rated (same rating) at
once.

479
 Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

Under [ : Rating], when you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all
the images in the folder or on the card will be rated.

Turn the < > dial to select a rating mark, then select [OK].
When you are not rating images or canceling the rating, select [ ].
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), the
display will change to [All found images].

If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be
rated as specified.

480
 Note

Values next to ratings are displayed as [###] if more than 1,000 images have that
rating.
With [ : Set image search conditions] and [ : Image jump w/ ], you can
display only the images given a specific rating.

481
Slide Show

You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.

1. Specify the images to be played back.

To play back all the images on the card, go to step 2.

If you want to specify the images to be played back in the slide show,
filter the images with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ).

2. Select [ : Slide show].

482
3. Set the playback as desired.

Select [Set up].

Set the [Display time], [Repeat] (repeated playback), and [Transition
effect] (effect when changing images) for the still photos.
To play background music, use [Background music] to select the
music ( ).
After completing the settings, press the < > button.

Display time

Repeat

483
 Transition effect

Background music

4. Start the slide show.

Select [Start].
After [Loading image...] is displayed, the slide show will start.

5. Exit the slide show.

To exit the slide show and return to the setting screen, press the
< > button.

484
 Note

To pause the slide show, press < >. During pause, [ ] will be displayed in the
upper left of the screen. Press < > again to resume the slide show.
During the automatic playback of still photos, you can press the < > button to
switch the display format ( ).
During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by using the < > < >
keys.
During auto playback or when playback is paused, you can press the < >< >
keys to view another image.
During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
The display time may differ depending on the image.

485
Setting Image Search Conditions

You can filter image display according to your search conditions. After setting the image
search conditions, you can play back and display only the found images.
You can also protect, rate, play a slide show, erase, and apply other operations to filtered
images.

1. Select [ : Set image search conditions].

486
2. Set the search conditions.

Use the < >< > keys to select an option.

Set with the < >< > keys or the < > button.
A checkmark [ ] (1) is appended to the left of the item. (Specified as
the search condition.)
If you select the item and press the < > button, the checkmark
[ ] will be removed (which cancels the search condition.)

Item Description

Rating Displays images with the selected (rating) condition.

Date Displays images taken on the selected shooting date.

Folder Displays images in the selected folder.

Protect Displays images with the selected (protect) condition.

Type of file Displays images in the selected file type.

3. Apply the search conditions.

Press < > and read the message displayed.

Select [OK].
The search condition is specified.

487
 4. Display the found images.

Press the < > button.

Only the images that match the set conditions (filtered) will be played
back.
When the images are filtered for display, the screen will have an outer
yellow frame (2).

Clearing the Search Conditions

Access the screen in step 2, then press the < > button to clear all the search conditions.

Caution

If no images match the search conditions, < > cannot be pressed in step 3.

Note

Search conditions may be cleared if you perform power, card, or image editing
operations.
Auto power off time may be extended while the [ : Set image search
conditions] screen is displayed.

488
Browsing Images with the Main Dial

In single-image display, you can turn the < > dial to jump through the images forward or
backward according to the jump method set.

1. Select [ : Image jump w/ ].

2. Select the jump method.

Note

With [Jump images by the specified number], you can turn the
< > dial to select the number of images to jump by.

When you select [Display by image rating], turn the < > dial
to specify the rating ( ). If you browse images with [ ] selected,
all the rated images will be displayed.

489
 3. Browse by jumping.

(1) Jump method

(2) Playback position
Press the < > button.
In single-image display, turn the < > dial.
You can browse by the set method.

Note

To search images by shooting date, select [ : Display by date].

To search images by folder, select [ : Display by folder].
To display either movies or still photos for cards that contain both, select [ :
Display movies only] or [ : Display stills only].

490
Histogram

The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall brightness. The
RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and gradation.

1. Select [ : Histogram disp].

2. Select an item.

491
[Brightness] display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image's brightness level. The
horizontal axis indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right)
while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The
more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the image. The more pixels there are
toward the right, the brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on the left, the
shadow detail will be lost. If there are too many pixels on the right, the highlight detail
will be lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By checking the image and its
brightness histogram, you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall
gradation.

Sample histograms

Dark image

Normal brightness

Bright image

492
[RGB] display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color's brightness
level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The horizontal axis indicates the
color's brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical
axis indicates how many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels
there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels there
are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on
the left, the respective color information will be lacking. If there are too many pixels on
the right, the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By checking the image's RGB
histogram, you can see the color's saturation and gradation condition, as well as white
balance inclination.

493
AF Point Display

You can display the AF points that were used to focus, which will be outlined in red on the
playback screen. If automatic AF point selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed.

1. Select [ : AF point disp.].

2. Select [Enable].

494
Resuming from Previous Playback

1. Select [ : View from last seen].

2. Select an item.

[Enable]: Playback resumes from the last image displayed (except

when you have just finished shooting).
[Disable]: Playback resumes from your most recent shot whenever the
camera is restarted.

495
HDMI HDR Output

You can view RAW images in HDR by connecting the camera to an HDR TV.

1. Select [ : HDMI HDR output].

2. Select [On].

Caution

Image operations such as RAW processing are not available during HDR display.

Note

Make sure the HDR TV is set up for HDR input. For details on how to switch inputs
on the TV, refer to the TV instruction manual.
Depending on the TV used, images may not look as expected.
Some image effects and information may not be displayed on an HDR TV.

496
Wireless Features

This chapter describes how to connect the camera to a smartphone wirelessly via
Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi® and send images to devices or Web services, how to control the
camera from a computer or wireless remote control, and other operations.

Caution

Important
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage from erroneous
wireless communication settings when using the camera. In addition, Canon cannot
be held liable for any other loss or damage caused by use of the camera.
When using wireless communication functions, establish appropriate security at
your own risk and discretion. Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage
caused by unauthorized access or other security breaches.

• Tab Menus: Wireless Settings

• Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection
• Connecting to a Smartphone
• Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
• Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
• Sending Images to a Web Service
• Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
• Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
• Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
• Registering Multiple Connection Settings
• Wi-Fi Settings
• Bluetooth Settings
• Nickname
• GPS Device Settings
• Changing or Deleting Connection Settings
• Airplane Mode
• Clearing Wireless Communication Settings to Default
• View Info Screen
• Virtual Keyboard Operations
• Responding to Error Messages
• Wireless Communication Function Precautions
• Security
• Checking Network Settings
• Wireless Communication Status

497
Tab Menus: Wireless Settings

Wireless Settings 1

(1) Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection

(2) Airplane mode
(3) Wi-Fi settings
(4) Bluetooth settings
(5) Nickname
(6) GPS device settings

Wireless Settings 2

(1) Clear wireless settings

498
 Caution

Wireless communication is not available while the camera is connected via an

interface cable to a computer or other device.
Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by connecting
them with an interface cable while the camera is connected to devices via Wi-Fi.
The camera cannot be connected via Wi-Fi if there is no card in the camera (except
for [ ]). Also, for [ ] and Web services, the camera cannot be connected via
Wi-Fi if there are no images saved on the card.
The Wi-Fi connection will be terminated if you set the camera's power to < >,
or open the card slot cover or battery compartment cover.
With a Wi-Fi connection established, the camera's auto power off does not function.

499
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select an item for the camera to connect to.

Connecting to a Smartphone ( )

Control the camera remotely and browse images on the camera over a Wi-Fi connection by
using the dedicated Camera Connect app on smartphones or tablets (collectively referred to
as “smartphones” in this manual).

Use with EOS software or other dedicated software ( )

Connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and operate the camera remotely using EOS
Utility (EOS software). With the dedicated application Image Transfer Utility 2, images on the
camera can also be sent to a computer automatically.

Printing from Wi-Fi printers ( )

Connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge (Wireless LAN) via Wi-Fi to print
images.

500
 Sending images to a Web service ( )

Send images directly from the camera to the image.canon cloud service for Canon
customers after you complete member registration (free of charge). Original files of images
sent to image.canon are retained for 30 days, without storage limitations, and can be
downloaded to computers or transferred to other Web services.

Connecting to a wireless remote control ( )

This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) via
Bluetooth for remote control shooting.

501
Connecting to a Smartphone

Turning on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on a Smartphone

Installing Camera Connect on a Smartphone

Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Camera Connect Functions

Maintaining a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off

Canceling the Pairing

Wi-Fi Connection Without Using Bluetooth

Automatic Image Transfer as You Shoot

Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera

Terminating Wi-Fi Connections

Settings to Make Images Viewable from Smartphones

You can do the following after pairing the camera with a smartphone compatible with
Bluetooth low energy technology (hereafter, “Bluetooth”).

Establish a Wi-Fi connection using only the smartphone ( ).

Establish a Wi-Fi connection with the camera even when it is off ( ).
Geotag images with GPS information acquired by the smartphone ( ).
Control the camera remotely from a smartphone ( ).

You can also do the following after connecting the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi.

Browse and save images on the camera from a smartphone ( ).

Control the camera remotely from a smartphone ( ).
Send images to a smartphone from the camera ( ).

502
 Turning on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on a Smartphone

Turn on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi from the smartphone settings screen. Note that pairing with the
camera is not possible from the smartphone's Bluetooth settings screen.

Note

To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see Wi-Fi Connection via
Access Points.

503
 Installing Camera Connect on a Smartphone

The dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) must be installed on the smartphone
on which Android or iOS is installed.

Use the latest version of the smartphone OS.

Camera Connect can be installed from Google Play or App Store. Google Play or App
Store can also be accessed using the QR codes that appear when the camera is paired
or connected via Wi-Fi to a smartphone.

Note

For the operating system versions supported by Camera Connect, refer to the
download site of Camera Connect.
Sample screens and other details in this guide may not match the actual user
interface elements after camera firmware updates or updates to Camera Connect,
Android, or iOS.

504
 Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via
Wi-Fi

Steps on the camera (1)

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select [ Connect to smartphone].

3. Select [Add a device to connect to].

505
4. Select an item.

If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display].

If Camera Connect is not installed, select [Android] or [iOS], scan the
displayed QR code with the smartphone to access Google Play or App
Store, and install Camera Connect.

506
5. Select [Pair via Bluetooth].

Pairing now begins.

Select [OK].

To pair with a different smartphone after pairing with one initially, select
[OK] on the screen shown above.

507
Steps on the smartphone (1)

6. Start Camera Connect.

7. Tap the camera for pairing.

If you are using an Android smartphone, go to step 9.

8. Tap [Pair] (iOS only).

508
Steps on the camera (2)

9. Select [OK].

10. Press < >.

Pairing is now complete, and the camera is connected to the

smartphone via Bluetooth.

A Bluetooth icon appears on the main Camera Connect screen.

509
 Caution

The camera cannot be connected to two or more devices at the same time via
Bluetooth. To switch to a different smartphone for the Bluetooth connection, see
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings.
Bluetooth connection consumes battery power even after the camera's auto power
off is activated. Therefore, the battery level may be low when you use the camera.

Troubleshooting pairing
Keeping pairing records for previously paired cameras on your smartphone will
prevent it from pairing with this camera. Before you try pairing again, remove
pairing records for previously paired cameras from your smartphone's Bluetooth
settings screen.

Note

With a Bluetooth connection established, you can operate the camera to send
images to the smartphone ( ).

510
Steps on the smartphone (2)

11. Tap a Camera Connect function.

In iOS, tap [Join] when a message is displayed to confirm camera

connection.
For the Camera Connect functions, see Camera Connect Functions.
When a Wi-Fi connection is established, the screen for the selected
function will appear.

[ Wi-Fi on] is displayed on the camera.

The Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are lit on the main Camera Connect
screen.

The Wi-Fi connection to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone is now complete.

For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see Terminating Wi-Fi Connections.
Terminating the Wi-Fi connection will switch the camera to the Bluetooth connection.
To reconnect via Wi-Fi, start Camera Connect and tap the function you will use.

511
[ Wi-Fi on] screen

Disconnect,exit
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Confirm set.
You can check the settings.
Error details
When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the error.

512
 Camera Connect Functions

Images on camera

Images can be browsed, deleted, or rated.

Images can be saved on a smartphone.
Effects can be applied to RAW images from a smartphone (Creative Assist).

Remote live view shooting

Enables remote shooting as you view a live image on the smartphone.

Auto transfer

Enables camera and app setting adjustment for automatic transfer of your shots ( ).

Bluetooth remote controller

Enables remote control of the camera from a smartphone paired via Bluetooth. (Not
available when connected via Wi-Fi.)
Auto power off is disabled while you are using the Bluetooth remote controller feature.

Location information

Not supported on this camera.

Camera settings

Camera settings can be changed.

513
 Maintaining a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off

Even when the camera power switch is set to < >, as long as it is paired to a
smartphone via Bluetooth, you can use the smartphone to connect via Wi-Fi and browse
images on the camera or perform other operations.
If you prefer not to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera when it is off, either set [Airplane mode]
to [On] or set [Bluetooth settings] to [Disable].

514
 Canceling the Pairing

Cancel pairing with a smartphone as follows.

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select [ Connect to smartphone].

If the history ( ) is displayed, switch the screen with the < >
< > keys.

3. Select [Edit/delete device].

515
4. Select the smartphone to cancel pairing with.

Smartphones currently paired with the camera are labeled [ ].

5. Select [Delete connection information].

6. Select [OK].

7. Clear the camera information on the smartphone.

In the smartphone's Bluetooth setting menu, clear the camera

information registered on the smartphone.

516
 Wi-Fi Connection Without Using Bluetooth

Steps on the camera (1)

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select [ Connect to smartphone].

If the history ( ) is displayed, switch the screen with the < >< >
keys.

3. Select [Add a device to connect to].

517
4. Select an item.

If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display].

5. Select [Connect via Wi-Fi].

518
 6. Check the SSID (network name) and password.

Check the SSID (1) and Password (2) displayed on the camera screen.
In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set [Password] to [None], the password will
not be displayed or required ( ).

Note

By selecting [Switch network] in step 6, you can establish a Wi-Fi connection via
an access point ( ).

519
Steps on the smartphone

7. Operate the smartphone to establish a Wi-Fi connection.

Smartphone's screen (sample)

Activate the smartphone's Wi-Fi function, then tap the SSID (network
name) checked in step 6 in Steps on the camera (1).
For the password, enter the password checked in step 6 in Steps on
the camera (1).

8. Start Camera Connect and tap the camera to connect to via Wi-Fi.

520
Steps on the camera (2)

9. Select [OK].

To specify viewable images, press the < > button. Configure as

described in Settings to Make Images Viewable from Smartphones,
starting in step 5.

The main window of Camera Connect will be displayed on the

smartphone.

The Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone is now complete.

Operate the camera using Camera Connect ( ).

For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see Terminating Wi-Fi Connections.
To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see Reconnecting via Wi-Fi.

Note

When connected via Wi-Fi, you can send images to a smartphone from the Quick
Control screen during playback ( ).

521
 Automatic Image Transfer as You Shoot

Your shots can be automatically sent to a smartphone. Before following these steps, make
sure the camera and smartphone are connected via Wi-Fi.

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi settings].

2. Select [Send to smartphone after shot].

3. In [Auto send], select [Enable].

522
4. Set [Size to send].

5. Take the picture.

523
 Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera

You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone paired via Bluetooth (Android
devices only) or connected via Wi-Fi.

1. Switch to playback.

2. Press the < > button.

3. Select [ Send images to smartphone].

If you perform this step while connected via Bluetooth, a message is

displayed, and the connection switches to a Wi-Fi connection.

4. Select sending options and send the images.

524
(1) Sending images individually

1. Select an image to send.

Use the < >< > keys or < > dial to select an image to send,
then press < >.
You can press the < > button to select the image using the index
display.

2. Select [Send img shown].

In [Size to send], you can select the image sending size.

When sending movies, you can select the image quality of movies to
send in [Quality to send].

525
(2) Sending multiple selected images

1. Press < >.

2. Select [Send selected].

526
3. Select images to send.

Use the < >< > keys or < > dial to select images to send,
then press < >.

You can press the < > button to select the images from 3-image
display. To return to the single-image display, press the < > button.
After selecting the images to send, press the < > button.

527
4. Select [Size to send].

On the displayed screen, select an image size.

When sending movies, select the image quality in [Quality to send].

5. Select [Send].

528
(3) Sending a specified range of images

1. Press < >.

2. Select [Send range].

3. Specify the range of images.

Select the first image (start point).

Select the last image (end point).
To cancel the selection, repeat this step.
You can press the < > button to change the number of images
shown in the index display.

529
4. Confirm the range.

Press the < > button.

5. Select [Size to send].

On the displayed screen, select an image size.

When sending movies, select the image quality in [Quality to send].

6. Select [Send].

530
(4) Sending all images on the card

1. Press < >.

2. Select [Send all card].

531
3. Select [Size to send].

On the displayed screen, select an image size.

When sending movies, select the image quality in [Quality to send].

4. Select [Send].

532
(5) Sending images that match the search conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image search conditions]
at once. For [Set image search conditions], refer to Setting Image Search Conditions.

1. Press < >.

2. Select [Send all found].

533
3. Select [Size to send].

On the displayed screen, select an image size.

When sending movies, select the image quality in [Quality to send].

4. Select [Send].

534
Ending image transfer
Sending images from the camera when paired via Bluetooth (Android)

Press the < > button on the image transfer screen.

Select [OK] to end image transfer and the Wi-Fi connection.

Sending images from the camera over a Wi-Fi connection

Press the < > button on the image transfer screen.

To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see Terminating Wi-Fi Connections.

Caution

During the image transfer operation, a picture cannot be taken even if the camera's
shutter button is pressed.

535
 Note

You can cancel the image transfer by selecting [Cancel] during the transfer.
You can select up to 999 files at a time.
With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone's power saving
function is recommended.
Selecting the reduced size for still photos applies to all still photos sent at that time.
Note that size still photos are not reduced.
Selecting compression for movies applies to all movies sent at that time. Note that
the camera does not reduce movies with a frame rate of or
.
When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.

536
 Terminating Wi-Fi Connections

Perform either of the following operations.

On the Camera Connect screen, tap [ ].

On the [ Wi-Fi on] screen, select [Disconnect,exit].

If the [ Wi-Fi on] screen is not displayed, select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

Select [Disconnect,exit], then select [OK] on the confirmation screen.

537
 Settings to Make Images Viewable from Smartphones

Images can be specified after the Wi-Fi connection is terminated.

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select [ Connect to smartphone].

If the history ( ) is displayed, switch the screen with the < >< >
keys.

3. Select [Edit/delete device].

538
4. Select a smartphone.

Select the name of the smartphone on which you want to make the
images viewable.

5. Select [Viewable imgs].

539
6. Select an item.

Select [OK] to access the setting screen.

[All images]

All images stored on the card become viewable.

[Images from past days]

Specify viewable images on the shooting-date basis. Images shot up to

nine days ago can be specified.
When [Images shot in past days] is selected, images shot up to the
specified number of days before the current date become viewable.
Use the < > < > keys to specify the number of days, then press
< > to confirm the selection.
Once you select [OK], the viewable images are set.

Caution

If [Viewable imgs] is set to any setting other than [All images],

remote shooting is not possible.

540
[Select by rating]

Specify viewable images depending on whether a rating is appended

(or not appended) or by the type of rating.
Once you select the type of rating, the viewable images are set.

[File number range] (Select range)

Select the first and last images from images arranged by the file
number to specify the viewable images.

1.Press < > to display the image selection screen. Use the < >
< > keys or < > dial to select images.
You can press the < > button to select the images using the
index display.

2.Select an image as the starting point (1).

3.Use the < > dial to select an image as the ending point (2).

4.Select [OK].

541
 Caution

Movie recording continues if the camera is disconnected from Wi-Fi during remote
movie recording.
With a Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone established, certain functions are
unavailable.
In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release timing
may be delayed.
When saving images to a smartphone, you cannot take a picture even if you press
the camera's shutter button. Also, the camera screen may turn off.

Note

With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone's power saving

function is recommended.

542
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi

Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility

Sending Images on the Camera Automatically

This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and perform
camera operations using EOS software or other dedicated software. Install the latest version
of software on the computer before setting up a Wi-Fi connection.
For computer operating instructions, refer to the computer user manual.

Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility

Using EOS Utility (EOS software), you can import images from the camera, control the
camera, and perform other operations.

Steps on the camera (1)

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

543
2. Select [ Remote control (EOS Utility)].

If the history ( ) is displayed, switch the screen with the < >< >
keys.

3. Select [Add a device to connect to].

4. Check the SSID (network name) and password.

Check the SSID (1) and Password (2) displayed on the camera screen.
In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set [Password] to [None], the password will
not be displayed or required. For details, see Wi-Fi Settings.

544
Steps on the computer (1)

5. Select the SSID, then enter the password.

Computer's screen (sample)

On the computer's network setting screen, select the SSID checked in

step 4 in Steps on the camera (1).
For the password, enter the password checked in step 4 in Steps on
the camera (1).

545
Steps on the camera (2)

6. Select [OK].

The following message is displayed. “******” represents the last six

digits of the MAC address of the camera to be connected.

546
Steps on the computer (2)

7. Start EOS Utility.

8. In EOS Utility, click [Pairing over Wi-Fi/LAN].

If a firewall-related message is displayed, select [Yes].

9. Click [Connect].

Select the camera to connect to, then click [Connect].

547
Steps on the camera (3)

10. Establish a Wi-Fi connection.

Select [OK].

548
[ Wi-Fi on] screen

Disconnect,exit
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Confirm set.
You can check the settings.
Error details
When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the error.
The Wi-Fi connection to a computer is now complete.

Operate the camera using EOS Utility on the computer.

To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see Reconnecting via Wi-Fi.

Caution

If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote shooting,
the following will occur.
• Power switch set to < >: recording continues
• Power switch set to < >: recording stops
The camera cannot be controlled directly in shooting when it has been switched to
movie recording mode via EOS Utility with the power switch set to < >.
With a Wi-Fi connection to EOS Utility established, certain functions are
unavailable.
In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release timing
may be delayed.
In Remote Live View shooting, the rate of image transmission is slower compared
to a connection via an interface cable. Therefore, moving subjects cannot be
displayed smoothly.

549
 Sending Images on the Camera Automatically

With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on the camera to
a computer automatically.

Steps on the computer (1)

1. Connect the computer and access point and start Image Transfer
Utility 2.

The screen to set up pairing is shown when you follow the instructions
displayed the first time Image Transfer Utility 2 starts up.

Steps on the camera (1)

2. Select [Auto send images to computer].

Select [ : Wi-Fi settings].

Select [Auto send images to computer].

3. In [Auto send], select [Enable].

550
4. Select [OK].

5. Connect to an access point via Wi-Fi.

Establish a Wi-Fi connection between the camera and the access point
connected to the computer. For connection instructions, see Wi-Fi
Connection via Access Points.

6. Select the computer to pair the camera with.

551
Steps on the computer (2)

7. Pair the camera and computer.

Select the camera, then click [Pairing].

Steps on the camera (2)

8. Select [Auto send images to computer].

Select [ : Wi-Fi settings].

Select [Auto send images to computer].

9. Select [Image sending options].

552
 10. Select what to send.

If you select [Selected imgs] in [Range to send], specify the images to

send on the [Select images to send] screen.
After the settings are complete, turn the camera off.

Images on the camera are automatically sent to the active computer when you turn the
camera on within range of the access point.

Caution

If images are not sent automatically, try restarting the camera.

553
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

Image Printing

Print Settings

This section describes how to print images by directly connecting the camera to a printer
supporting PictBridge (Wireless LAN) via Wi-Fi. For printer operating instructions, refer to
the printer user manual.

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select [ Print from Wi-Fi printer].

If the history ( ) is displayed, switch the screen with the < >< >
keys.

554
3. Select [Add a device to connect to].

4. Check the SSID (network name) and password.

Check the SSID (1) and Password (2) displayed on the camera screen.
In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set [Password] to [None], the password will
not be displayed or required ( ).

5. Set up the printer.

In the Wi-Fi settings menu of the printer to be used, select the SSID
you have checked.

For the password, enter the password checked in step 4.

555
 6. Select the printer.

In the list of detected printers, select the printer to connect to via Wi-Fi.
If your preferred printer is not listed, selecting [Search again] may
enable the camera to find and display it.

Note

To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see Wi-Fi Connection via
Access Points.

556
 Image Printing

Printing images individually

1. Select the image to be printed.

Use the < >< > keys or < > dial to select an image to print,
then press < >.
You can press the < > button to select the image using the index
display.

2. Select [Print image].

557
3. Print the image.

For the print setting procedures, see Print Settings.

Select [Print], then [OK] to start printing.

558
Printing according to specified image options

1. Press < >.

2. Select [Print order].

3. Set the printing options.

For the print setting procedures, see Print Ordering (DPOF).

If the print order is complete before establishing a Wi-Fi connection, go
to step 4.

559
 4. Select [Print].

[Print] can be selected only when an image is selected and the printer
is ready to print.

5. Set the [Paper settings] ( ).

6. Print the image.

When [OK] is selected, printing starts.

Caution

Shooting is not possible while connected to a printer via Wi-Fi.

Movies cannot be printed.
Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
Certain printers may not be able to imprint the file number.
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a bright
background or on the border.
RAW images cannot be printed by selecting [Print order]. When printing, select
[Print image] and print.

560
 Note

When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
Depending on the image's file size and image quality, it may take some time to start
printing after you select [Print].
To stop printing, press < > while [Cancel] is displayed, then select [OK].
When printing with [Print order], if you stopped printing and want to resume
printing of the remaining images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not
resume if any of the following occurs.
• You change the print order or delete any of the print ordered images before
resuming printing.
• When index is set, you change the paper setting before resuming printing.
If a problem occurs during printing, see Notes.

561
 Print Settings

The screen display and setting options vary depending on the printer. Also, certain
settings may not be available. For details, refer to the printer's instruction manual.

Print settings screen

(1) Sets date or file number printing ( ).

(2) Sets the printing effects ( ).
(3) Sets the number of copies to print ( ).
(4) Sets the print area ( ).
(5) Sets the paper size, type, and layout ( , , ).
(6) Returns to the image selection screen.
(7) Starts the printing.
(8) The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings may not be selectable.

562
Paper settings

Select [Paper settings].

[ ] Setting the paper size

Select the size of the paper in the printer.

563
[ ] Setting the paper type

Select the type of the paper in the printer.

[ ] Setting the page layout

Select the page layout.

Caution

If the image's aspect ratio is different from the printing paper's aspect ratio, the
image may be cropped significantly when you print it as a borderless print. Images
may also be printed at lower resolution.

[ ] Setting printing of the date/file number

Select [ ].
Select what to print.

564
[ ] Setting the printing effects (Image optimization)

Select [ ].
Select printing effects.

Caution

If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO speed

(H), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.
The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the printer's own
default settings as set by the printer's manufacturer. Refer to the printer's
instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings are.

[ ] Setting the number of copies

Select [ ].
Select the number of copies to print.

565
Cropping the image
Set cropping immediately before printing. Changing other print settings after you crop
images may require you to crop the images again.

1. On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].

2. Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.

The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The shape of
the frame (aspect ratio) can be changed with [Paper settings].

Resizing the cropping frame size

Use the < > or < > button to resize the cropping frame.

Moving the cropping frame

Use the < > < >< >< > keys to move the frame vertically or
horizontally.

Switching the orientation of the cropping frame

Pressing the < > button will toggle the cropping frame between the
vertical and horizontal orientations.

3. Press < > to exit the cropping.

You can check the cropped image area in the upper left of the print
setting screen.

566
 Caution

Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as you
specified.
The smaller the cropping frame, the lower the resolution at which images are
printed.

Note

Handling printer errors

If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.)
and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer. For details on resuming
printing, refer to the printer's instruction manual.

Error messages
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the camera
screen. After fixing the problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing
problem, refer to the printer's instruction manual.

Paper error
Confirm that paper is loaded correctly.

Ink error
Check the printer's ink level and the waste ink tank.

Hardware error
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.

File error
The selected image cannot be printed. Images taken with a different camera or
images edited with a computer may not be printable.

567
Sending Images to a Web Service

Registering image.canon

Sending Images

This section describes how to send images to image.canon.

Registering image.canon

Link the camera to image.canon to send images directly from the camera.

A computer or smartphone with a browser and internet connection is required.

You will need to enter an email address used on your computer or smartphone.
For instructions on using image.canon services and details on countries and regions of
availability, visit the site (https://image.canon/).
Separate ISP connection and access point fees may apply.

Steps on the camera (1)

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select [ Upload to Web service].

568
3. Select [I Agree].

4. Establish a Wi-Fi connection.

Connect to an access point via Wi-Fi. Go to step 6 in Wi-Fi Connection

via Access Points.

5. Enter your email address.

Enter your email address, then select [OK].

569
6. Enter a four-digit number.

Enter a four-digit number of your choice, then select [OK].

7. Select [OK].

The [ ] icon changes to [ ].

570
Steps on the computer or smartphone

8. Set up camera web link.

Access the page in the notification message.

Follow the instructions to complete the settings on the camera web link
settings page.

571
Steps on the camera (2)

9. Add “image.canon” as a destination.

Select [ ].
image.canon is now added.

572
 Sending Images

Images can be sent to image.canon. Original files of images sent to image.canon are
retained for 30 days, without storage limitations, and can be downloaded to computers or
transferred to other Web services.

Connecting to image.canon via Wi-Fi

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select image.canon.

If the history ( ) is displayed, switch the screen with the < >< >
keys.

573
Sending images individually

1. Select an image to send.

Use the < >< > keys or < > dial to select an image to send,
then press < >.
You can press the < > button to select the image using the index
display.

2. Select [Send img shown].

In [Size to send], you can select the image sending size.

On the screen after images are sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi
connection.

574
Sending multiple selected images

1. Press < >.

2. Select [Send selected].

3. Select images to send.

Use the < >< > keys or < > dial to select an image to send,
then press < >.
You can press the < > button to select the image from 3-image
display. To return to the single-image display, press the < > button.
After selecting the images to send, press the < > button.

575
4. Select [Size to send].

On the displayed screen, select an image size.

5. Select [Send].

On the screen after images are sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi
connection.

576
Sending a specified range of images
Specify the range of images to send all the images in the range at once.

1. Press < >.

2. Select [Send range].

3. Specify the range of images.

Select the first image (start point).

Select the last image (end point).
Images will be selected and [ ] will appear.
To cancel the selection, repeat this step.
You can press the < > button to change the number of images
shown in the index display.

577
4. Confirm the range.

Press the < > button.

5. Select [Size to send].

On the displayed screen, select an image size.

6. Select [Send].

On the screen after images are sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi
connection.

578
Sending all images on the card

1. Press < >.

2. Select [Send all card].

579
3. Select [Size to send].

On the displayed screen, select an image size.

4. Select [Send].

On the screen after images are sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi
connection.

580
Sending images that match the search conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image search conditions]
at once. For [Set image search conditions], refer to Setting Image Search Conditions.

1. Press < >.

2. Select [Send all found].

581
 3. Select [Size to send].

On the displayed screen, select an image size.

4. Select [Send].

On the screen after images are sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi
connection.

Caution

Shooting is not possible when connected via Wi-Fi to image.canon, even if you
press the camera's shutter button.

582
 Note

Certain images may not be able to be sent with [Send range], [Send all card], or
[Send all found].
When you reduce the image size, all images to be sent at the same time are
resized. Note that movies or size still photos are not reduced.
[Reduced] is enabled only for still photos shot with cameras of the same model as
this camera. Still photos shot with other models are sent without resizing.
A record of sent images can be checked when you access image.canon.
When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.

583
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points

Camera Access Point Mode

Manual IP Address Setup

This section describes how to join a Wi-Fi network via an access point compatible with WPS
(PBC mode).
First, check the position of the WPS button and how long to press it. It may take approx. one
minute to establish a Wi-Fi connection.

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select an item.

If the history ( ) is displayed, switch the screen with the < >< >
keys.

584
3. Select [Add a device to connect to].

The following message is displayed if you have selected [ Connect

to smartphone]. If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not
display].

On the [Connect to smartphone] screen displayed next, select

[Connect via Wi-Fi].

4. Select [Switch network].

Displayed when [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected.

585
5. Select [Connect with WPS].

Note

For [Camera access point mode] displayed in step 5, see

Camera Access Point Mode.

6. Select [WPS (PBC mode)].

Select [OK].

586
7. Connect to the access point via Wi-Fi.

Press the access point's WPS button.

Select [OK].

8. Select [Auto setting].

Select [OK] to access the setting screen for the Wi-Fi function.
If an error occurs with [Auto setting], see Manual IP Address Setup.

587
9. Specify the settings for the Wi-Fi function.

[ Connect to smartphone]

On the smartphone's Wi-Fi setting screen, tap the SSID (network

name) shown on the camera, then enter the password of the access
point for the connection.

Go to step 8 in Wi-Fi Connection Without Using Bluetooth.

[ Remote control (EOS Utility)]

Go to step 7 or 8 in Steps on the computer (2).

[ Print from Wi-Fi printer]

Go to step 6 in Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi.

Registering image.canon
Go to step 5 in Registering image.canon.

588
 Camera Access Point Mode

Camera access point mode is a connection mode for connecting the camera directly to each
device via Wi-Fi. Displayed when [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected after [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].

589
 Manual IP Address Setup

The items displayed vary depending on the Wi-Fi function.

1. Select [Manual setting].

Select [OK].

2. Select an item.

Select an item to access the screen for numerical input.

To use a gateway, select [Enable], then select [Address].

590
3. Enter the desired values.

Turn the < > dial to move the input position in the upper area, and
use the < >< > keys to select numbers to enter. Press < > to
enter the selected number.
To set the entered numbers and return to the screen for step 2, press
the < > button.

4. Select [OK].

When you have completed setting the necessary items, select [OK].
If you are not sure what to enter, see Checking Network Settings, or
ask the network administrator or another person knowledgeable about
the network.

591
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control

This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, )
via Bluetooth for remote control shooting.

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select [ Connect to Wireless Remote].

3. Select [Add a device to connect to].

592
 4. Pair the devices.

When the [Pairing] screen appears, press and hold the <W> and <T>
buttons on the BR-E1 simultaneously for at least 3 sec.
After a message confirms that the camera is paired with the BR-E1,
press < >.

5. Set up the camera for remote shooting.

When shooting still photos, select [ ] or [ ] as the drive mode ( ).

When recording movies, set [ : Remote control] to [Enable].

For instructions after the pairing is complete, refer to the BR-E1's

Instruction Manual.

Caution

Bluetooth connections consume battery power even after the camera's auto power
off is activated.

Note

When you will not use Bluetooth, setting this function to [Disable] in step 1 is
recommended.

593
 Canceling the Pairing

Before pairing with a different BR-E1, clear the information about the connected remote
control.

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select [ Connect to Wireless Remote].

3. Select [Delete connection information].

594
4. Select [OK].

595
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi

Follow these steps to reconnect to devices or Web services with registered connection
settings.

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select an item.

Select an item to connect to via Wi-Fi from the displayed history. If the
item is not displayed, use the < >< > keys to switch screens.
If [Connection history] is set to [Hide], the history will not be displayed
( ).

596
3. Operate the connected device.

[ ] Smartphone

Start Camera Connect.

If the smartphone's connection destination has been changed, restore

the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access point
as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi,
“_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.

[ ] Computer

On the computer, start the EOS software.

If the computer's connection destination has been changed, restore the

setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access point as
the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi,
“_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.

[ ] Printer

If the printer's connection destination has been changed, restore the

setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access point as
the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi,
“_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.

597
Registering Multiple Connection Settings

You can register up to 10 connection settings for the wireless communication functions.

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select an item.

If the history ( ) is displayed, switch the screen with the < >< >
keys.
For details on [ Connect to smartphone], see Connecting to a
Smartphone.
For details on [ Remote control (EOS Utility)], see Connecting to a
Computer via Wi-Fi.
For details on [ Print from Wi-Fi printer], see Connecting to a
Printer via Wi-Fi.
When sending images to a Web service, see Sending Images to a Web
Service.

Note

To delete connection settings, see Changing or Deleting Connection Settings.

598
Wi-Fi Settings

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi settings].

2. Select an item.

Wi-Fi
When the use of electronic devices and wireless devices is prohibited, such as on board
airplanes or in hospitals, set it to [Disable].

Password
Set to [None] to allow a Wi-Fi connection to be established without a password (except
when connecting to an access point via Wi-Fi).

Connection history
You can set the connection history of devices connected via Wi-Fi to [Show] or [Hide].

Auto send images to computer

With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on the
camera to a computer automatically ( ).

Send to smartphone after shot

Your shots can be sent to a smartphone automatically ( ).

MAC address
You can check the MAC address of the camera.

599
Bluetooth Settings

1. Select [ : Bluetooth settings].

2. Select an item.

Bluetooth
If you will not use the Bluetooth function, select [Disable].

Check connection information

You can check the name and communication status of the paired device.

Bluetooth address
You can check the camera's Bluetooth address.

600
Nickname

You can change the camera nickname (displayed on smartphones and other cameras) as
needed.

1. Select [ : Nickname].

2. Enter text using the Virtual Keyboard Operations.

When you finish entering characters, press the < > button.

601
GPS Device Settings

GP-E2

Smartphone

GPS Connection Display

You can geotag images with GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) or a Bluetooth enabled
smartphone.

GP-E2

1. Attach GP-E2 to the camera.

Attach GP-E2 to the camera's hot shoe and turn it on. For details, refer
to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.

2. Select [ : GPS device settings].

602
 3. In [Select GPS device], select [GPS receiver].

4. Take the picture.

For details on [Set up], refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.

Caution

Precautions when using GP-E2

Before use, check the countries and regions where use of GPS is allowed, and
follow local regulations.
Update the GP-E2 firmware to Ver. 2.0.0 or later.
Firmware updating requires an interface cable. For updating instructions, visit the
Canon website.
GP-E2 cannot be connected to the camera with a cable.
The camera does not record the shooting direction.

603
 Smartphone

Complete these settings after installing the dedicated Camera Connect app ( ) on the
smartphone.

1. On the smartphone, activate location services.

2. Establish a Bluetooth connection.

Start Camera Connect and pair the camera and smartphone via
Bluetooth.

3. Select [ : GPS device settings].

4. In [Select GPS device], select [Smartphone].

5. Take the picture.

Images are geotagged with the information from the smartphone.

604
 GPS Connection Display

You can check the status of smartphone location information acquisition in the GPS
connection icon on the screens for still photo shooting or movie recording ( and ,
respectively).

Gray: Location services are off

Blinking: Location information cannot be acquired
On: Location information acquired

For details on how GPS connection status is indicated when GP-E2 is used, refer to the
GP-E2 Instruction Manual.

Geotagging images as you shoot

Images you shoot while the GPS icon is on are geotagged.

Geotagging information

You can check the location information added to your shots on the shooting information
screen ( ).

(1) Latitude
(2) Longitude
(3) Elevation
(4) UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)

605
 Caution

The smartphone can acquire location information only while it is paired with the
camera via Bluetooth.
Direction information is not acquired.
Acquired location information may not be accurate, depending on traveling
conditions or smartphone status.
It may take some time to acquire location information from the smartphone after
you turn the camera on.
Location information is no longer acquired after any of the following operations.
• Pairing with a wireless remote control via Bluetooth
• Turning the camera off
• Quitting Camera Connect
• Deactivating location services on the smartphone
Location information is no longer acquired in any of the following situations.
• The camera power turns off
• The Bluetooth connection is ended
• The smartphone's remaining battery level is low

Note

Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the same as

Greenwich Mean Time.
For movies, the GPS information initially acquired is added.

606
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings

To change or delete the connection settings, terminate the Wi-Fi connection first.

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Select an item.

If the history ( ) is displayed, switch the screen with the < >< >
keys.

3. Select [Edit/delete device].

You can change the Bluetooth connection by selecting a smartphone

labeled with [ ] in gray. After the [Connect to smartphone] screen is
displayed, select [Pair via Bluetooth], then press < > on the next
screen.
607
 4. Select the device for which to change or delete the connection
settings.

5. Select an option.

Change or delete the connection settings on the displayed screen.

Change device nickname

You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard ( ).

Viewable imgs ( )
Displayed when [ Connect to smartphone] is selected. Settings will appear at the
bottom of the screen.

Delete connection information

When deleting connection information for a paired smartphone, also delete the camera
information registered on the smartphone ( ).

Note

To delete image.canon connection settings, visit the image.canon website.

608
Airplane Mode

You can temporarily disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions.

1. Select [ : Airplane mode].

2. Set to [On].

[ ] is displayed on the screen.

Note

[ ] may not be displayed during Live View shooting, movie recording, or playback,
depending on display settings. If it is not displayed, press the < > button
repeatedly to access detailed information display.

609
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings to Default

All wireless communication settings can be deleted. By deleting the wireless communication
settings, you can prevent their information from being exposed when you lend or give your
camera to other people.

1. Select [ : Clear wireless settings].

2. Select [OK].

Caution

Performing [ : Clear all camera settings] does not delete the wireless
communication setting information.
If you have paired the camera with a smartphone, on the smartphone's Bluetooth
settings screen, delete the connection information of the camera for which you
restored default wireless communication settings.

610
View Info Screen

You can check error details and the camera's MAC address.

1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].

2. Press the < > button.

The [View info] screen will appear.

When an error has occurred, press < > to display the error content.

611
Virtual Keyboard Operations

(1) Input area, for entering text

(2) Cursor keys, for moving in the input area
(3) Current no. of characters/no. available
(4) Keyboard
(5) Switch input modes
(6) Space
(7) Delete a character in the input area
(8) Finish the text entry

Use the < > dial to move within (2).

Use the < > < > < >< > keys to move within (4)–(8).
Press < > to confirm input or when switching input modes.

612
Responding to Error Messages

When an error occurs, display the details of the error by following one of the procedures
below. Then, eliminate the cause of the error by referring to the examples shown in this
chapter.

On the [View info] screen, press < >.

Select [Error details] on the [Wi-Fi on] screen.

11 12 21 22 23 61 63 64

65 66 67 68 69 91 125 126

127 141 142 151 152

Note

When an error occurs, [Err**] is displayed in the upper right of the [Wi-Fi/
Bluetooth connection] screen. It disappears when the camera's power is set to
< >.

11: Connection target not found

In the case of [ ], is Camera Connect running?

• Establish a connection using Camera Connect ( ).

In the case of [ ], is the EOS software running?

• Start the EOS software and reestablish the connection ( ).

In the case of [ ], is the power of the printer on?

• Turn on the printer.

Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
• This error occurs if the passwords do not match when the authentication method for
encryption is set to [Open system].
Check upper- and lower-case letters, and make sure the correct password for
authentication is set on the camera ( ).

12: Connection target not found

Is the power of the target device and access point on?

• Turn on the target device and access point, then wait a while. If a connection still
cannot be established, perform the procedures to establish the connection again.

613
21: No address assigned by DHCP server

What to check on the camera

On the camera, IP address is set to [Auto setting]. Is this the correct setting?
• If no DHCP server is used, specify the settings after setting the IP address to
[Manual setting] on the camera ( ).

What to check on the DHCP server

Is the power of the DHCP server on?

• Turn on the DHCP server.

Are there enough addresses for assignment by the DHCP server?

• Increase the number of addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
• Remove devices assigned addresses by the DHCP server from the network to
reduce the number of addresses in use.

Is the DHCP server working correctly?

• Check the DHCP server settings to make sure it is working correctly as a DHCP
server.
• If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DHCP server is available.

614
22: No response from DNS server

What to check on the camera

On the camera, does the DNS server's IP address setting match the server's
actual address?
• Set the IP address to [Manual setting]. Then, on the camera, set the IP address
that matches the address of the DNS server used ( ).

What to check on the DNS server

Is the power of the DNS server on?

• Turn on the DNS server.

Are the DNS server settings for IP addresses and the corresponding names
correct?
• On the DNS server, make sure IP addresses and the corresponding names are
entered correctly.

Is the DNS server working correctly?

• Check the DNS server settings to make sure it is working correctly as a DNS server.
• If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DNS server is available.

What to check on the network as a whole

Does the network that you are trying to connect to via Wi-Fi include a router or
similar device that serves as a gateway?
• If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway address and
set it on the camera ( , ).
• Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on all network
devices including the camera.

615
23: Device with same IP address exists on selected network

What to check on the camera

Do the camera and another device connected via Wi-Fi to the same network have
the same IP address?
• Change the camera's IP address to avoid using the same address as another
device on the network. Otherwise, change the IP address of the device that has a
duplicate address.
• If the camera's IP address is set to [Manual setting] in network environments using
a DHCP server, change the setting to [Auto setting] ( ).

Note

Responding to error messages 21–23

Also check the following points when responding to errors numbered 21–23.
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
• This error occurs if the passwords do not match when the authentication
method for encryption is set to [Open system]. Check upper- and lower-case
letters, and make sure the correct password for authentication is set on the
camera ( ).

616
 61: Selected SSID wireless LAN network not found

Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the antenna
of the access point?
• Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible from the point of
view of the camera ( ).

What to check on the camera

Does the SSID set on the camera match that of the access point?
• Check the SSID at the access point, then set the same SSID on the camera.

What to check at the access point

Is the access point turned on?

• Turn on the power of the access point.

If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in use
registered at the access point?
• Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point. The MAC
address can be checked on the [View info] screen ( ).

617
63: Wireless LAN authentication failed

Are the camera and the access point set to use the same authentication method?
• The camera supports the following authentication methods: [Open system],
[Shared key], and [WPA/WPA2-PSK].

Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
• Check upper- and lower-case letters, and make sure the correct password for
authentication is set on the camera.

If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in use
registered at the access point?
• Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point. The MAC
address can be checked on the [View info] screen ( ).

64: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal

Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption method?
• The camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP, and AES.

If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in use
registered at the access point?
• Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point. The MAC
address can be checked on the [View info] screen ( ).

65: Wireless LAN connection lost

Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the antenna
of the access point?
• Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible from the point of
view of the camera.

The Wi-Fi connection was lost for some reason, and the connection cannot be
restored.
• The following are possible reasons: excessive access to the access point from
another device, a microwave oven or similar appliance in use nearby (interfering
with IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band)), or influence of rain or high humidity ( ).

618
66: Incorrect wireless LAN password

Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
• Check upper- and lower-case letters, and make sure the correct password for
authentication is set on the camera.

67: Incorrect wireless LAN encryption method

Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption method?
• The camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP, and AES.

If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in use
registered at the access point?
• Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point. The MAC
address can be checked on the [View info] screen ( ).

68: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal. Retry from the

beginning.

Did you hold down the access point's WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button for the
specified period of time?
• Hold down the WPS button for the period of time specified in the access point's
instruction manual.

Are you trying to establish a connection near the access point?

• Try establishing the connection when both devices are within reach of each other.

69: Multiple wireless LAN terminals have been found. Cannot

connect. Retry from the beginning.

Connection is in progress by other access points in Pushbutton Connection

mode (PBC mode) of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup).
• Wait a while before trying to establish the connection.

91: Other error

A problem other than error code number 11 to 69 occurred.

• Turn the camera's power switch off and on.

619
125: Check the network settings

Is the network connected?

• Check the connection status of the network.

126: Could not connect to server

image.canon is under maintenance or temporarily busy.

• Try accessing the service again later.

127: An error has occurred

A problem other than error code number 121 to 126 occurred while the camera is
connected to the Web service.
• Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to image.canon.

141: Printer is busy. Try connecting again.

Is the printer performing a printing process?

• Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the printing process is
finished.

Is another camera connected to the printer via Wi-Fi?

• Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the Wi-Fi connection
to the other camera has been terminated.

142: Could not acquire printer information. Reconnect to try again.

Is the power of the printer on?

• Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection after turning on the printer.

151: Transmission canceled

Automatic image transfer to the computer was somehow interrupted.

• To resume automatic image transfer, set the camera's power switch to < >,
and then set it to < >.

152: Card's write protect switch is set to lock

Is the card's write-protect switch set to the locked position?

• Slide the card's write-protect switch to the writing position.

620
Wireless Communication Function Precautions

Distance Between the Camera and the Smartphone

Installation Location of Access Point Antenna

Nearby Electronic Devices

Precautions for Using Multiple Cameras

If the transmission rate drops, the connection is lost, or other problems occur when using the
wireless communication functions, try the following corrective actions.

Distance Between the Camera and the Smartphone

If the camera is too far from the smartphone, a Wi-Fi connection may not be established
even when Bluetooth connection is possible. In this case, bring the camera and the
smartphone closer together, then establish a Wi-Fi connection.

621
Installation Location of Access Point Antenna

When using indoors, install the device in the room where you are using the camera.
Install the device where people or objects do not come between the device and the
camera.

622
 Nearby Electronic Devices

If the Wi-Fi transmission rate drops because of the influence of the following electronic
devices, stop using them or move further away from the devices to transmit communication.

The camera communicates over Wi-Fi via IEEE 802.11b/g/n using radio waves in the
2.4 GHz band. For this reason, the Wi-Fi transmission rate will drop if there are
Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, cordless telephones, microphones, smartphones,
other cameras, or similar devices operating on the same frequency band nearby.

623
Precautions for Using Multiple Cameras

When connecting multiple cameras to one access point via Wi-Fi, make sure the
cameras' IP addresses are different.
When multiple cameras are connected to one access point via Wi-Fi, the transmission
rate drops.
When there are multiple IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band) access points, leave a gap of
five channels between each Wi-Fi channel to reduce radio wave interference. For
example, use channels 1, 6, and 11, channels 2 and 7, or channels 3 and 8.

624
Security

If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may occur.

Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor wireless LAN transmissions and attempt
to acquire the data you are sending.
Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to the network you are
using to steal, modify, or destroy information. Additionally, you could fall victim to other
types of unauthorized access such as impersonation (where someone assumes an
identity to gain access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to cover their
tracks when infiltrating other systems).

It is recommended to make use of the systems and functions to thoroughly secure your
network, preventing these types of problems from occurring.

625
Checking Network Settings

Windows
Open the Windows [Command Prompt], then type ipconfig/all and press the <Enter> key.
In addition to the IP address assigned to the computer, the subnet mask, gateway, and DNS
server information are also displayed.

macOS
In macOS, open the [Terminal] application, enter ifconfig -a, and press the <Return> key.
The IP address assigned to the computer is indicated in the [en0] item next to [inet], in the
format “***.***.***.***”.
For information about the [Terminal] application, refer to the macOS help.

To avoid using the same IP address for the computer and other devices on the network,
change the rightmost number when configuring the IP address assigned to the camera in
the processes described in Manual IP Address Setup.
Example: 192.168.1.10

626
Wireless Communication Status

Wireless communication status can be checked on the screen.

Quick Control screen Information display screen during playback

(1) Wi-Fi function

(2) Bluetooth function
(3) Wireless signal strength

Screen
Communication Status
Wi-Fi Function Wireless Signal Strength

Wi-Fi: Disable
Not connected Off
Wi-Fi: Enable

Connecting (Blinking)
Connected

Sending data ( )
Connection error (Blinking)

627
Bluetooth Function Indicator
Bluetooth Function Connection Status Screen

Bluetooth connected
Other than [Disable]
Bluetooth not connected

[Disable] Bluetooth not connected Not displayed

628
Set-up

This chapter describes menu settings on the set-up ([ : Set-up]) tab.

to the right of page titles indicates functions only available in Creative Zone modes
(< >, < >, < >, or < >).

• Tab Menus: Set-up

• Selecting a Folder
• File Numbering
• Auto Rotate
• Adding Orientation Information to Movies
• Formatting
• Auto Power Off
• Display Brightness
• Screen Off/On
• Date/Time/Zone
• Language
• Video System
• Touch Control
• Beeps
• Battery Information
• Sensor Cleaning
• Viewfinder Display
• INFO Button Display Options
• Grid Display When Shooting
• Shutter Button Function for Movies
• Switching AF Point Selection and AE Lock Buttons
• HDMI Resolution
• Multi-Function Lock

• Custom Functions (C.Fn)

• Clearing Settings

• Copyright Information
• Other Information

629
Tab Menus: Set-up

Set-up 1

(1) Select folder

(2) File numbering
(3) Auto rotate
(4) Format card

Set-up 2

(1) Auto power off

(2) Disp. brightness
(3) Screen off/on btn
(4) Date/Time/Zone
(5) Language

630
 Set-up 3

(1) Video system

(2) Touch control
(3) Beep
(4) Battery info.
(5) Sensor cleaning

Set-up 4

(1) Viewfinder display

(2) button display options
(3) Switch / button
(4) HDMI resolution
(5) Multi function lock

631
 Set-up 5

(1) Custom Functions(C.Fn)

(2) Clear settings

(3) Copyright information

(4) Manual/software URL

(5) Certification Logo Display

(6) Firmware

Caution

[Screen off/on btn], [Viewfinder display], [ button display options], and

[Firmware] are not displayed in Live View shooting or movie recording.

In Live View shooting, the following screen is displayed for [ 4].

(1) Grid when shooting

(2) Switch / button
(3) HDMI resolution
(4) Multi function lock

632
 In movie recording, the following screen is displayed for [ 1].

(1) Select folder

(2) File numbering
(3) Auto rotate
(4) Add rotate info
(5) Format card

In movie recording, the following screen is displayed for [ 4].

(1) Grid when shooting

(2) Shutter btn function for movies
(3) Switch / button
(4) HDMI resolution
(5) Multi function lock

633
 In Basic Zone modes, the following screen is displayed for [ 5].

(1) Manual/software URL

634
Selecting a Folder

Creating a Folder

Selecting a Folder

You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are to be saved.

Creating a Folder

1. Select [ : Select folder].

2. Select [Create folder].

635
3. Select [OK].

636
 Selecting a Folder

(1) Folder name

(2) Number of images in folder
(3) Lowest file number
(4) Highest file number

Select a folder on the folder selection screen.

Captured images are stored in your selected folder.

Note

Folders
A folder can contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001–9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is created
automatically. Also, if manual reset ( ) is executed, a new folder will be created
automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.

Creating folders with a computer

With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open the
DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and organize your
images. The folder name must follow the format “100ABC_D”. The first three digits
are always the folder number from 100 to 999. The last five characters can be any
combination of upper- and lower-case letters from A to Z, numerals, and the
underscore “_”. The space cannot be used. Also note that two folder names cannot
share the same three-digit folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and
“100W_XYZ”) even if the remaining five characters in each name are different.

637
File Numbering

Continuous

Auto Reset

Manual Reset

The captured images saved in a folder are assigned a file number from 0001 to 9999. You
can change how the image files are numbered.
(Example)

(1) File number

1. Select [ : File numbering].

638
 2. Set the item.

Select [Numbering].
Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset].

If you want to reset the file numbering, select [Manual reset] ( ).

Select [OK] to create a new folder, and the file number will start with
0001.

Caution

If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible even if
the card still has storage capacity. The screen will display a message telling you to
replace the card. Replace it with a new card.

639
 Continuous

When you wish to continue the file numbering sequence even

after the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file numbering continues in
sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you want to save images numbered anywhere
between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously, the
file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing
images on the card or in the folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is
recommended that you use a newly-formatted card each time.

File numbering after replacing the card

Card 1

Card 2

(1) Next sequential file number

File numbering after creating a folder

Card 1

640
 Auto Reset

When you wish to restart the file numbering from 0001 each time
the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering restarts from 0001 for the
new images saved. This is useful if you want to organize images by cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously, the
file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing
images on the card or in the folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering
starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.

File numbering after replacing the card

Card 1

Card 2

(1) File numbering is reset

File numbering after creating a folder

Card 1

641
 Manual Reset

When you wish to reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start from
file number 0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created automatically and the
file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001.
This is useful, for example, if you want to use different folders for the images taken
yesterday and the ones taken today.

642
Auto Rotate

You can change the auto rotation setting that straightens images shot in vertical orientation
when they are displayed.

1. Select [ : Auto rotate].

2. Select an item.

On
Automatically rotates images for display on both the camera and
computers.

On
Automatically rotates images only for display on computers.

Off

Caution

Images captured with auto rotation set to [Off] will not rotate during playback even
if you later set auto rotation to [On].

643
 Note

If a picture is taken while the camera is pointing up or down, auto rotation to the
proper orientation for viewing may not be performed correctly.
If images are not rotated automatically on a computer, try using EOS software.

644
Adding Orientation Information to Movies

For movies recorded with the camera held vertically, orientation information indicating which
side is up can be added automatically to enable playback in the same orientation on
smartphones or other devices.

1. Select [ : Add rotate info].

2. Select a setting item.

Enable
Play movies on smartphones or other devices in the orientation in
which they were recorded.

Disable
Play movies horizontally on smartphones or other devices, regardless
of the recording orientation.

Note

Movies are played horizontally on the camera, regardless of the [ : Add

rotate info] setting.

645
Formatting

If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer,
format the card with this camera.

Caution

When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be erased.
Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you
need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a computer, etc.
before formatting the card.

1. Select [ : Format card].

646
 2. Format the card.

Select [OK].

For low-level formatting, press the < > button to add a checkmark
[ ] to [Low level format], then select [OK].

Note

The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the
capacity indicated on the card.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

647
 Conditions requiring card formatting

The card is new.

The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full of images or data.
A card-related error is displayed.

Low-level formatting
Perform low-level formatting if the card's writing or reading speed seems slow or if you
want to totally erase the data on the card.
Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card, the formatting
will take longer than normal formatting.
During low-level formatting, you can cancel formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in
this case, normal formatting will already be complete and you can use the card as usual.

Card file formats

SD/SDHC cards will be formatted in FAT32. SDXC cards will be formatted in
exFAT.
Individual movies recorded to exFAT cards are recorded as a single file (without splitting
them into multiple files) even if they exceed 4 GB, so the resulting movie file will exceed
4 GB.

Caution

It may not be possible to use SDXC cards formatted with this camera in other
cameras. Also note that exFAT-formatted cards may not be recognized by
some computer operating systems or card readers.
Formatting or erasing data on a card does not completely erase the data. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When disposing of cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically
destroying cards.

648
Auto Power Off

You can change the camera's auto power off time.

1. Select [ : Auto power off].

2. Select an item.

Note

The screen turns off in approx. 30 min. even when set to [ ]. To activate the
screen, press the < > button.

649
Display Brightness

1. Select [ : Disp. brightness].

2. Make the adjustment.

Referring to the gray chart, use the < >< > keys to adjust the
brightness, then press < >.

Note

To check the image's exposure, referring to the histogram is recommended ( ).

650
Screen Off/On

You can set the camera so that the screen turns off and on as you press the shutter button
halfway in viewfinder shooting.

1. Select [ : Screen off/on btn].

2. Select an item.

Shutter btn.
The screen turns off when you press the shutter button halfway. To turn
on the screen, release the button.

Shutter/DISP
Display is cleared and the screen turns off when you press the shutter
button halfway. Press the < > button to display the menu screen.

Remains on
The screen does not turn off when you press the shutter button
halfway. To turn off the screen, press the < > button.

651
Date/Time/Zone

When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone have been reset, follow
these steps to set the time zone first.
By setting the time zone first, you can simply adjust this setting as needed in the future and
the date/time will be updated to match it.
Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date and time information, be
sure to set your date/time.

1. Select [ : Date/Time/Zone].

652
2. Set the time zone.

Use the < >< > keys to select [Time zone].

Press < >.

Press < >.

Use the < >< > keys to select the time zone, then press < >.
If your time zone is not listed, press the < > button, then set the
difference from UTC in [Time difference].

653
 Use the < >< > keys to select a [Time difference] item (+ –/
hour/minute), then press < >.
Use the < >< > keys to set it, then press < >.
After entering the time zone or time difference, use the < >< >
keys to select [OK], then press < >.

3. Set the date and time.

Use the < >< > keys to select an item, then press < >.
Use the < >< > keys to set it, then press < >.

654
 4. Set daylight saving time.

Set it as necessary.
Use the < >< > keys to select [ ], then press < >.
Use the < >< > keys to select [ ], then press < >.
When the daylight saving time is set to [ ], the time set in step 3 will
advance by 1 hour. If [ ] is set, the daylight saving time will be
canceled and the time will go back by 1 hour.

5. Exit the setting.

Use the < >< > keys to select [OK].

Caution

The [Date/Time/Zone] setting may be reset when the camera is stored without the
battery, when the battery is depleted, or when it is exposed to freezing
temperatures for an extended period. If this happens, set them once again.
After changing [Zone/Time difference], check that the correct date/time are set.

655
 Note

Auto power off time may be extended while the [ : Date/Time/Zone] screen is
displayed.

656
Language

1. Select [ : Language ].

2. Set the desired language.

657
Video System

Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting determines the frame
rates available when you record movies.

1. Select [ : Video system].

2. Select an item.

For NTSC
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South
Korea, Mexico, etc.).

For PAL
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.).

658
Touch Control

1. Select [ : Touch control].

2. Select an item.

[Sensitive] provides a more reactive touch-screen panel response than

[Standard].
To disable touch operations, select [Disable].

Caution

Precautions for touch-screen operations

Do not use sharp objects such as fingernails or ballpoint pens for touch operations.
Do not use wet fingers for touch operations. If the screen has any moisture or if
your fingers are wet, the touch-screen panel may not respond or malfunction may
occur. In this case, turn off the power and wipe off the moisture with a cloth.
Attaching any commercially available protective sheet or sticker on the screen may
degrade the touch operation response.
If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch operation
response may be poor.

659
Beeps

1. Select [ : Beep].

2. Select an item.

Enable
The camera beeps after focusing and in response to touch operations.

Touch
Disables beeping for touch operations.

Disable
Disables beeping for focus confirmation, self-timer shooting, and touch
operations.

660
Battery Information

You can check the conditions of the battery you are using on the screen.

1. Select [ : Battery info.].

(1) Battery position

(2) Model of battery or household power source used.
(3) The battery level ( ) is displayed.
(4) Battery's recharge performance level is displayed in three levels.

: Battery's recharge performance is good.

: Battery's recharge performance is slightly degraded.

: Purchasing a new battery is recommended.

Caution

Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E17 is recommended. If you use batteries
that are not genuine Canon products, the camera's full performance may not be
attained or malfunction may result.

661
 Note

If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the instructions in the

message.

662
Sensor Cleaning

Cleaning Now

Cleaning Automatically

Cleaning Manually

Cleaning Now

1. Select [ : Sensor cleaning].

2. Select [Clean now ].

Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.

663
Cleaning Automatically

1. Select [Auto cleaning ].

2. Select a setting item.

Use the < >< > keys to select an item, then press < >.

Note

For best results, clean with the camera in a stable position on a desk or other flat
surface.
Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much. Note that
[Clean now ] may not be available immediately after cleaning.
Dots of light may appear in captured images or on the shooting screen if the sensor
is affected by cosmic rays or similar factors. By selecting [Clean now ], their
appearance may be suppressed ( ).

664
 Cleaning Manually

Dust that could not be removed by automatic cleaning can be removed manually with a
commercially available blower or similar tool.
Always use a fully charged battery.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it
done by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

1. Select [ : Sensor cleaning].

2. Select [Clean manually].

3. Select [OK].

4. Remove the lens and clean the sensor.

665
 5. End the cleaning.

Set the power switch to < >.

Note

Using the household power outlet accessories (sold separately) is recommended.

Caution

While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the power is cut
off, the shutter will close and the reflex mirror will go back down. These may
result in damaging the image sensor, shutter curtains, and reflex mirror.
• Setting the power switch to < >.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with care.
Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the sensor.
Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If the power
is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or reflex mirror may get
damaged.
Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air may damage
the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and scratch it.
If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper will sound as
a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the sensor
cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

666
Viewfinder Display

Electronic Level

Grid

Flicker Detection

1. Select [ : Viewfinder display].

2. Select an item.

Select with the < >< > keys, then press < >.

667
 Electronic Level

The electronic level appears when you press the shutter button halfway. Also available in
vertical shooting.

(1) Electronic level

(2) Horizontal
(3) Tilted 1°
(4) Tilted 2° or more

Caution

Only horizontal tilt can be checked. (Forward/backward tilt is not displayed.)

There may be a margin of error of approx. ±1°.

Note

An asterisk “*” to the right of [ : Viewfinder display] indicates that the default
viewfinder display setting has been changed.

668
 Grid

You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt or compose the
shot.

Flicker Detection

If you set this function, < > will appear in the viewfinder when the camera detects
flicker caused by the blinking of the light source.

Note

If you set [ : Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable], you can shoot with reduced
unevenness of exposure caused by the flicker ( ).

669
INFO Button Display Options

You can select the information displayed on the screen in response to pressing the < >
button when the camera is ready to shoot.

1. Select [ : button display options].

2. Select an option.

Select the desired display option, then add a checkmark [ ].

Select [OK].

670
 Electronic Level

The red line turns green when the image is essentially straight.

Only horizontal tilt can be checked. (Forward/backward tilt is not displayed.)

(1) Horizontal

Caution

There may be a margin of error of approx. ±1°.

If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level's margin of error will be larger.

Note

The electronic level is not displayed in Live View shooting when the AF method is
set to [ +Tracking].
For details on [Quick Control screen], see Quick Control Screen (in Viewfinder
Shooting).

671
Grid Display When Shooting

You can display grid lines in Live View shooting or movie recording to help you level the
camera vertically and horizontally.

1. Display the Live View image.

Press the < > button.

2. Select [ : Grid when shooting].

672
 3. Select an item.

Off
No grid display.

3x3
Displays grid lines in a 3x3 pattern to help you level the camera
vertically and horizontally.

6x4
Displays grid lines in a 6x4 pattern to help you level the camera
vertically and horizontally.

3x3+diag
Displays a grid together with diagonal lines to help you level the
camera vertically and horizontally and compose with better balance by
aligning the intersections over the subject.

Note

Live View shooting ends when you select [ : Dust Delete Data] or either [Clean
now ] or [Clean manually] in [ : Sensor cleaning]. To start Live View
shooting again, press the < > button.

673
Shutter Button Function for Movies

You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway or completely
during movie recording.

1. Select [ : Shutter btn function for movies].

674
2. Select an item.

Half-press
Specify the function performed by pressing the shutter button halfway.

Fully-press
Specify the function performed by pressing the shutter button
completely.

With [Fully-press] set to [Start/stop mov rec], you can start/stop movie
recording not only by pressing the movie shooting button but also by
pressing the shutter button completely, or by using Wireless Remote
Control BR-E1 or Remote Switch RS-60E3.

675
Switching AF Point Selection and AE Lock Buttons

You can switch the functions of the and buttons, if this is more convenient for your
hand size or how you hold the grip.

1. Select [ : Switch / button].

2. Select a setting item.

676
HDMI Resolution

Set the image output resolution used when the camera is connected to a television or
external recording device with an HDMI cable.

1. Select [ : HDMI resolution].

2. Select an item.

Auto
Images are automatically displayed at optimal resolution for connected
televisions.

1080p
Output at 1080p resolution. Select if you prefer to avoid display or
delay issues when the camera switches resolution.

677
Multi-Function Lock

Specify camera controls to lock when the Multi-function lock is enabled. This can help
prevent accidentally changing settings.

1. Select [ : Multi function lock].

2. Select camera controls to lock.

Press < > to add a checkmark [ ].

Select [OK].
The camera returns to shooting standby, and controls are now locked
or unlocked each time you press the < > button.

678
 Note

If it is changed from the default setting, an asterisk “*” will be displayed on the right
edge of [ : Multi function lock].
Setting details are reset when [Clear all camera settings] in [ : Clear settings] is
performed.
You can also lock/unlock controls in shooting standby under the following
conditions.
• When displaying the electronic level
• When the screen is off
• When the screen is closed

679
Custom Functions (C.Fn)

Setting Custom Functions

Custom Functions

Custom Function Setting Items

Setting Custom Functions

1. Select [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)].

2. Select a Custom Function number.

Use the < >< > keys to select a function number (1), then press
< >.
Current Custom Function settings are indicated below the respective
function number at the bottom of the screen (2).

680
 3. Change the setting as desired.

Select a setting option.

To set up another Custom Function, repeat steps 2–3.

Note

To clear all Custom Function settings you have configured (except [Custom
Controls]), select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] in [ : Clear settings].

681
 Custom Functions

Shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV) shooting or movie
recording. (Settings are disabled.)

C.Fn I: Exposure
LV Shooting Movie Recording
(1) Exposure level increments ○ ○

(2) ISO expansion ○ ○

(3) ISO speed setting increments ○ In < > mode

(4) Safety shift ○

(5) Exposure comp. auto cancel ○ ○

C.Fn II: Autofocus/Drive

LV Shooting Movie Recording
(1) Auto AF pt sel.:EOS iTR AF

(2) AF area selection method ○ ○

(3) AF point display during focus

(4) VF display illumination

(5) Mirror lockup

C.Fn III: Operation/Others

LV Shooting Movie Recording
(1) Warnings in viewfinder
(2) Screen display when power ON

(3) Custom Controls Varies by settings

(4) Retract lens on power off ○ ○

682
 Custom Function Setting Items

Custom Functions are organized into three groups based on the type of function: C.Fn I:
Exposure, C.Fn II: Autofocus/Drive, C.Fn III: Operation/Others.

C.Fn I: Exposure

C.Fn 1: Exposure level increments

Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture value, exposure compensation,
AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc.

0:1/3-stop

1:1/2-stop

Note

When set to [1:1/2-stop], exposure level display is as follows.

C.Fn 2: ISO expansion

Makes “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) available as an ISO speed you can set. Note that “H” is
not available when [ : Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced].

0:Disable

1:Enable

C.Fn 3: ISO speed setting increments

You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to a whole-stop.

0:1/3-stop

1:1-stop

Note

Even if [1:1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop increments
when ISO Auto is set.

683
 C.Fn 4: Safety shift

You can shoot with the shutter speed and aperture value automatically adjusted to enable
standard exposure if standard exposure would not be available under your specified shutter
speed or aperture value in < > or < > mode.

0:Disable

1:Enable

C.Fn 5: Exposure comp. auto cancel

0:Enable
When you set the power switch to < >, the exposure compensation setting will be
canceled.

1:Disable
The exposure compensation setting will not be canceled even if you set the power
switch to < >.

Note

The exposure compensation setting is not canceled after auto power off, even
when set to [0:Enable].

684
C.Fn II: Autofocus/Drive

C.Fn 6: Auto AF pt sel.:EOS iTR AF

Use this function to autofocus in viewfinder shooting by recognizing people. Applies when
the AF area selection mode is set to [Manual select.:Zone AF], [Manual select.:Large
Zone AF], or [Auto selection AF].

0:EOS iTR AF (Face priority)

Faces are given greater priority than with [1:Enable] when the camera selects AF points
automatically.
In [One-Shot AF] mode, this makes it easier to focus on faces of still human subjects in
the AF area.
Also makes it easier to focus on faces in the AF area in [AI Servo AF] mode.
Once focus is achieved, AF points are automatically selected to keep focusing on the
faces initially in focus.

1:Enable
The camera selects AF points automatically based on AF information and information on
recognized people.
In [One-Shot AF] mode, focusing on a still human subject in the AF area is made
easier.
In [AI Servo AF] mode, focusing on a human subject in the AF area is made easier. If
no people are detected, the camera focuses on the nearest subject. Once focus is
achieved, AF points are automatically selected so that the camera continues to focus on
the color of the area it focused on first.

2:Disable
AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information.

Caution

With a setting of [0:EOS iTR AF (Face priority)] or [1:Enable], focusing will take
slightly longer than with setting [2:Disable].
Even with a setting of [0:EOS iTR AF (Face priority)] or [1:Enable], the expected
result may not be obtained depending on the shooting conditions and subject.
Under low light, where external Speedlites for EOS cameras automatically emit an
AF-assist beam, AF points are selected automatically based only on AF
information. (Information on recognized people is not used for AF.)

685
 C.Fn 7: AF area selection method

0: →AF area selection button

After you press the < > or < > button in viewfinder shooting, pressing the < >
button changes the AF area selection mode. In Live View shooting, pressing the < >
button changes the AF method.

1: →Main Dial
After you press the < > or < > button, turning the dial changes the AF area
selection mode.

Note

When [1: →Main Dial] is set, use the < >< > keys to move the AF point
horizontally.

C.Fn 8: AF point display during focus

You can set whether to display AF points during AF point selection, before AF begins
(shooting standby), when AF begins, during AF, and when subjects are in focus.

○: Displayed, ×: Not displayed

AF point Before AF
AF point display during focus During AF Focus achieved
selected (shooting standby)
0:Selected (constant) ○ ○ ○ ○

1:All (constant) ○ ○ ○ ○

2:Selected (pre-AF,focused) ○ ○ × ○

3:Selected AF pt (focused) ○ × × ○

4:Disable display ○ × × ×

686
 C.Fn 9: VF display illumination

0:Auto
The AF points achieving focus in low light or with a dark subject will automatically light
up in red.

1:Enable
The AF points light up in red regardless of the ambient light level.

2:Disable
The AF points do not light up in red.

Note

When you press the < > or < > button, the AF points will light up in red
regardless of this setting.
The aspect ratio lines, electronic level, and grid in the viewfinder will also light up in
red.

C.Fn 10: Mirror lockup

You can prevent the camera vibration blur due to the mechanical vibrations (mirror shock)
inside the camera during shooting with super telephoto lenses or shooting close-ups (macro
photography). See Mirror Lockup for the mirror lockup procedure.

0:Disable

1:Enable

687
C.Fn III: Operation/Others

C.Fn 11: Warnings in viewfinder

The < > icon can be displayed in the field of view of the viewfinder when any of the
following functions are set ( ).
Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, then press < > to add
a checkmark [ ]. Select [OK] to register the setting.

When monochrome set

If the [ : Picture Style] is set to [Monochrome] ( ), the warning icon will appear.

When WB is corrected
The warning icon appears when white balance correction is set ( ).

When is set
If [ : High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] ( ), the warning
icon will appear.

Note

If you set any of the checkmarked [ ] functions, [ ] will also appear for the
respective setting displayed on the Creative Zone screen ( ).

C.Fn 12: Screen display when power ON

0:Display on
When you turn on the power, the Quick Control screen will appear ( ).

1:Previous display status

When you turn on the power, the camera starts up with the same screen display as
before the power was turned off. For this reason, if you turn off the camera with the
screen off, the screen remains blank the next time the camera is turned on, which helps
conserve battery power. The menu operations and image playback will be available as
usual.

688
 C.Fn 13: Custom Controls

You can assign frequently used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your
preferences for easy operations.

1. Select a camera control.

2. Select a function to assign.

Press < > to set it.

Note

With the screen in step 1 displayed, you can press the < > button to restore the
Custom Control settings to their defaults. [Custom Controls] settings are not
cleared even if you select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)].

689
Functions available for camera controls

AF

Function

Metering and AF start ○ ○ ○

AF stop ○ ○

Exposure

Function

Metering start ○

AE lock/FE lock ○ ○

AE lock (while button pressed) ○

AE lock ○ ○

FE lock ○ ○

Expo comp (hold btn, turn ) ○

Flash exp. comp ○

Movies

Function

Pause Movie Servo AF ○

Image

Function

Image quality ○

690
 Operation

Function

Screen On/Off ○ ○

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection ○

Maximize screen brightness (temp) ○

Menu display ○

Flash function settings ○

Depth-of-field preview ○

No function (disabled) ○ ○ ○

C.Fn 14: Retract lens on power off

You can set whether to retract gear-type STM lenses (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM)
automatically when the camera's power switch is set to < >.

0:Enable

1:Disable

Caution

With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.

Note

When [0:Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens's focus
mode switch setting (AF or MF).

691
Clearing Settings

The camera's shooting function settings and menu settings can be restored to their defaults.
This option is available in Creative Zone modes.

1. Select [ : Clear settings].

2. Select [Clear all camera settings].

3. Select [OK].

692
 Note

Performing [Clear all camera settings] also resets [ : Multi function lock]
settings and the locked state of the < > button.

FAQ

Clearing all camera settings

After the procedure above, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] in [ : Clear
settings] to clear all the Custom Function settings ( ). Note that [Custom Controls]
settings are not cleared.

693
Copyright Information

Checking the Copyright Information

Deleting the Copyright Information

When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as Exif information.

1. Select [ : Copyright information].

2. Select an item.

694
 3. Enter text.

Turn the < > dial to select a character, then press < > to enter it.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.

4. Exit the setting.

Press the < > button, then press [OK].

Checking the Copyright Information

When you select [Display copyright info.] in step 2, you can check the [Author] and
[Copyright] information that you entered.

695
 Deleting the Copyright Information

When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete the [Author] and
[Copyright] information.

Caution

If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed entirely when
you select [Display copyright info.].

Note

You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS
software).

696
Other Information

Manual/software URL

To download instruction manuals, select [ : Manual/software URL] and scan the

displayed QR code with a smartphone. You can also use a computer to access the
website at the URL displayed and download software.

Certification Logo Display

Select [ : Certification Logo Display] to display some of the logos of the camera's
certifications. Other certification logos can be found on the camera body and packaging.

Firmware

Select [ : Firmware] to update the firmware of the camera, lens, or other compatible
accessories in use.

697
My Menu

On the My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions you often adjust.

Caution

When [ : Menu display] is set to [Guided], the [ ] tab will not be displayed.
Change [ : Menu display] to [Standard] ( ).

• Tab Menus: My Menu

• Registering My Menu

698
Tab Menus: My Menu

(1) Add My Menu tab

(2) Delete all My Menu tabs
(3) Delete all items
(4) Menu display

699
Registering My Menu

Adding My Menu Tabs

Registering Menu Items on My Menu Tabs

My Menu Tab Settings

Deleting All My Menu Tabs/Deleting All Items

Menu display

Adding My Menu Tabs

1. Select [Add My Menu tab].

2. Select [OK].

You can create up to five My Menu tabs by repeating steps 1 and 2.

700
Registering Menu Items on My Menu Tabs

1. Select [MY MENU*: Configure].

2. Select [Select items to register].

3. Register the desired items.

Select an item, then press < >.

Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
You can register up to six items.
To return to the screen in step 2, press the < > button.

701
 My Menu Tab Settings

You can sort and delete items under the menu tab, and rename or delete the menu tab.

Sort registered items

You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select [Sort registered
items], select an item to rearrange, then press < >. With [ ] displayed, turn the < >
dial to rearrange the item, then press < >.

Delete selected items/Delete all items on tab

You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items] deletes one item at a
time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all the registered items under the tab.

Delete tab
You can delete the current My Menu tab. Select [Delete tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab.

Caution

Performing [Delete tab] will also clear tab names renamed with [Rename tab].

702
Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].

1. Select [Rename tab].

2. Enter text.

Select [ ] or press the < > button to delete any unneeded

characters.
Turn the dial to select a character, then press < >.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.

3. Confirm input.

Press the < > button, then select [OK].

703
 Deleting All My Menu Tabs/Deleting All Items

You can delete all the created My Menu tabs or My Menu items registered under them.

Delete all My Menu tabs

You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete all My Menu tabs],
all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will be deleted and the [ ] tab will revert to
its default.

Caution

Performing [Delete all My Menu tabs] will also clear tab names renamed with
[Rename tab].

Delete all items

You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] tabs. The
tab(s) will remain. When [Delete all items] is selected, all the items registered under all the
created tabs will be deleted.

704
 Menu display

You can select [Menu display] to set the menu screen that is to appear first when you press
the < > button.

Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.

Display from My Menu tab

Displays with the [ ] tab selected.

Display only My Menu tab

Restricts display to the [ ] tab ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] tabs are not displayed).

705
Reference

This chapter provides reference information on camera features.

• Importing Images to a Computer

• Household Power Outlet Accessory
• Troubleshooting Guide
• Error Codes
• System Map
• ISO Speed in Movie Recording
• Information Display
• AF Sensor
• Compatible Lenses and Autofocusing (Viewfinder Shooting)
• Specifications

706
Importing Images to a Computer

Connecting to a Computer via an Interface Cable (Sold Separately)

Card Reader

Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi

You can use EOS software to import images from the camera to a computer. There are
three ways to do this.

Connecting to a Computer via an Interface Cable (Sold

Separately)

1. Install the software ( ).

2. Connect the camera to the computer with an interface cable (sold

separately).

As an interface cable, you can use a IFC-600PCU cable (sold

separately).
Insert the cord's plug into the camera's digital terminal (USB Micro-B).
Connect the cord's plug to the computer's USB terminal (USB Type-A).

3. Use EOS Utility to import the images.

Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.

707
 Caution

With Wi-Fi connection established, the camera cannot communicate with the
computer even if they are connected with an interface cable.

Card Reader

You can use a card reader to import images to a computer.

1. Install the software ( ).

2. Insert the card into the card reader.

3. Use Digital Photo Professional to import the images.

Refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.

Note

When downloading images from the camera to a computer with a card reader
without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the computer.

Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi

You can connect the camera to the computer via Wi-Fi and import images to the computer
( ).

708
Household Power Outlet Accessory

You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the DC Coupler DR-E18
and AC Adapter AC-E6N (each sold separately).

1. Connect the DC coupler's plug.

Connect the DC coupler's plug to the AC Adapter's socket.

2. Connect the power cord.

Connect the power cord as shown in the illustration.

After using the camera, unplug the power plug from the power outlet.

3. Insert the DC coupler.

Open the battery compartment cover and insert the DC coupler

securely until it locks.

709
 4. Pull the DC cord through the hole.

Open the DC cord hole cover and pass the cord through as shown.
Close the battery compartment cover.

Warning

Do not connect or disconnect the power cord when the camera's power switch is
set to < >.

710
Troubleshooting Guide

Power-related problems

Shooting-related problems

Problems with wireless features

Operation problems

Display problems

Playback problems

Sensor cleaning problems

Computer connection problems

If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide. If this
Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, contact your dealer or nearest Canon
Service Center.

711
 Power-related problems

The battery does not charge.

If the battery's remaining capacity ( ) is 94% or higher, the battery will not be charged.
Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E17.

The charger's lamp blinks at high speed.

If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2) communication with the battery
failed (with a non-Canon battery pack), the protection circuit will stop charging, and the
charge lamp will blink in orange at a constant high speed. In the case of (1), unplug the
charger's power plug from the power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery to the
charger. Wait a few minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the
problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

The charger's lamp does not blink.

If the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger is high, the charger will
not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp off). During charging, if the battery's
temperature becomes high for any reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks).
When the battery temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.

The camera is not activated even when the power switch is set to
< >.

Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed ( ).

Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera ( ).
Charge the battery ( ).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed ( ).

The access lamp still lights or blinks even when the power switch is set
to < >.

If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the access lamp
will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When the image recording is
complete, the power will turn off automatically.

[Battery communication error. Does this battery/do these batteries

display the Canon logo?] is displayed.

Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E17.
Remove and install the battery again ( ).
If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.

712
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.

Use a fully charged battery ( ).

The battery performance may have degraded. See [ : Battery info.] to check the
battery's recharge performance level ( ). If the battery performance is poor, replace the
battery with a new one.
The number of available shots will decrease with any of the following operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens's Image Stabilizer.
• Using the screen frequently.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie recording for a prolonged period.
• Using the wireless communication functions.

The camera turns off by itself.

Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take effect, set [ : Auto
power off] to [Disable] ( ).
Even if [ : Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the screen will still turn off after the
camera is left idle for approx. 30 min. (The camera's power does not turn off.)

713
 Shooting-related problems

The lens cannot be attached.

The camera cannot be used with RF or EF-M lenses ( ).

The viewfinder is dark.

Install a charged battery in the camera ( ).

No images can be shot or recorded.

Make sure the card is properly inserted ( ).

Slide the card's write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting ( ).
If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make space
( , ).
Shooting is not possible during One-Shot AF when the focus indicator < > in the
viewfinder is blinking, or when the AF point is orange during Live View shooting or movie
recording. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus
manually ( , ).

The card cannot be used.

If a card error message is displayed, see Removal.

An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in another

camera.

Since SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card with this camera and
then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed and it may not be possible
to use the card.

I have to press the shutter button twice to take a picture.

Set [10: Mirror lockup] in [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)] to [0:Disable] ( ).

714
The image is out of focus or blurred.

Set the lens's focus mode switch to < > ( ).

Press the shutter button ( ) gently to prevent camera shake ( ).
With a lens equipped with an Image Stabilizer, set the Image Stabilizer switch to
< >.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter speed ( ), set a
higher ISO speed ( ), use flash ( , ), or use a tripod.
See Minimizing blurred photos.

There are fewer AF points or the Area AF frame shape is different.

The number of available AF points, the focusing patterns, and the Area AF frame shape
vary by lens.

The AF point is blinking.

For details on AF points lighting up or blinking when you press the < > or < >
button, see Meaning of Lit or Blinking AF Points.

The AF points do not light up in red.

The AF points light up in red when you shoot under low light or when focus is achieved
on a dark subject.
In the < >, < >, < >, or < > mode, you can set whether to have the AF
points light up in red for when focus is achieved ( ).

I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.

Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in the AI Servo AF/
Servo AF mode and when servo takes effect in AI Focus AF mode ( , ).

The continuous shooting speed is slow.

The continuous shooting speed for high-speed continuous shooting may be lower,
depending on conditions such as these: temperature, battery level, flicker reduction,
shutter speed, aperture value, subject conditions, brightness, AF operation, type of lens,
live view shooting, use of flash, and shooting settings, etc. For details, see Drive Mode.

715
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.

If you shoot a subject that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the file size will be
larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower than the number listed in Still photo
file size / Number of possible shots / Maximum burst for continuous shooting.

Even after I change the card, the maximum burst displayed for
continuous shooting does not change.

The maximum burst displayed does not change when you switch cards, even if you
switch to a high-speed card. The maximum burst shown in the table on Still photo file
size / Number of possible shots / Maximum burst for continuous shooting is based on
Canon's testing card. (The faster the card's writing speed, the higher the actual
maximum burst will be.) For this reason, the maximum burst displayed may differ from
the actual maximum burst.

Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation, the image comes out

bright.

Set [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] ( ). When [Low], [Standard], or

[High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure compensation or flash exposure
compensation, the image may come out bright.

I cannot set the exposure compensation when both manual exposure

and ISO Auto are set.

See Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto to set the exposure compensation.

Not all the lens aberration correction options are displayed.

Although [Chromatic aberr corr] and [Diffraction correction] are not displayed when
[Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], both functions are applied in shooting, as
when set to [Enable].
During movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer], [Diffraction correction], or
[Distortion correction] will not be displayed.

The built-in flash does not fire.

Shooting with the flash may be temporarily disabled to protect the flash head if the built-
in flash is used repeatedly over a short period.

716
The external Speedlite does not fire.

Make sure the external Speedlite is securely attached to the camera.

The Speedlite always fires at full output.

If you use a flash unit other than an EL/EX series Speedlite, the flash will always fire at
full output ( ).
The flash always fires at full output when [Flash metering mode] in external flash
Custom Function settings is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash) ( ).

Flash exposure compensation cannot be set for the external Speedlite.

If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, compensation amount
cannot be set with the camera. When the external Speedlite's flash exposure
compensation is canceled (set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the
camera.

Remote control shooting is not possible.

When taking still photos, set the drive mode to < > or < > ( ). When recording
movies, set [ : Remote control] to [Enable] ( ).
Check the position of the remote control's release timing switch.
If you are using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, see Wireless Remote Control BR-E1.
To use a remote control for time-lapse movie recording, see Time-Lapse Movies.

I cannot shoot with Live View.

Set [ : Live View shoot.] to [Enable].

The shutter makes two release sounds during Live View shooting.

If you use flash with Live View shooting, the shutter will make two release sounds each
time you shoot.

The electronic level is not displayed in Live View shooting.

The electronic level is not displayed in Live View shooting when the AF method is set to
[ +Tracking].

717
During Live View shooting, a white or red icon is displayed.

It indicates that the camera's internal temperature is high. Image quality of still photos
may be worse when a white [ ] icon is displayed. If the red [ ] icon is displayed, it
indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop automatically ( ).

Expanded ISO speeds cannot be selected for still photo shooting.

Check the [ISO speed] setting under [ : ISO speed settings].

Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ : Highlight tone priority] is set to
[Enable] or [Enhanced].

During movie recording, the red icon is displayed.

It indicates that the camera's internal temperature is high. If the red [ ] icon is
displayed, it indicates that the movie recording will soon stop automatically ( ).

Movie recording stops by itself.

If the card's writing speed is slow, movie recording may stop automatically. For cards
that can record movies, see Card performance requirements. To find out the card's
writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer's website, etc.
If you record a movie for 29 min. 59 sec., the movie recording will stop automatically.

The ISO speed cannot be set for movie recording.

In shooting modes other than < >, the ISO speed is set automatically. In < >
mode, you can manually set the ISO speed ( ).

The manually set ISO speed changes when switching to movie

recording.

[ISO speed] in [ : ISO speed settings] ( ) applies to viewfinder shooting and

Live View shooting, and [ISO speed] in [ : ISO speed settings] ( ) applies to
movie recording.

718
Expanded ISO speeds cannot be selected for movie recording.

Check the [ISO speed] setting under [ : ISO speed settings].

Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ : Highlight tone priority] is set to
[Enable].

The exposure changes during movie recording.

If you change the shutter speed or aperture value during movie recording, the changes
in the exposure may be recorded.
Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming during
movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure changes or lens
sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio level, or loss of focus.

The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie recording.

Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be caused by

fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources during movie recording. Also,
changes in the exposure (brightness) or color tone may be recorded. In < > mode,
using a slower shutter speed may reduce the problem. The problem may be more
noticeable in time-lapse movie recording.

The subject looks distorted during movie recording.

If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving subject, the
image may look distorted.

I cannot take still photos during movie recording.

Still photos cannot be taken during movie recording. To take still photos, stop the movie
recording and perform viewfinder shooting or Live View shooting.

719
 Problems with wireless features

Cannot pair with a smartphone.

Use a smartphone compliant with Bluetooth Specification Version 4.1 or later.

Turn on Bluetooth from the smartphone settings screen.
Pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone's Bluetooth settings screen.
Install the dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) on the smartphone ( ).
A previously paired smartphone cannot be paired with the camera again if the camera's
registration is retained on the smartphone. In this case, remove the camera's
registration retained in the Bluetooth settings on the smartphone and try pairing again
( ).

Wi-Fi function cannot be set.

If the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an interface cable,

Wi-Fi functions cannot be set. Disconnect the interface cable before setting any
functions ( ).

A device connected with an interface cable cannot be used.

Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by connecting them
with an interface cable while the camera is connected to devices via Wi-Fi. Terminate
the Wi-Fi connection before connecting the interface cable.

Operations such as shooting and playback are not possible.

With a Wi-Fi connection established, operations such as shooting and playback may not
be possible. Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, then perform the operation.

Cannot reconnect to a smartphone.

Even with a combination of the same camera and smartphone, if you have changed the
settings or selected a different setting, reconnection may not be established even after
selecting the same SSID. In this case, delete the camera connection settings from the
Wi-Fi settings on the smartphone and set up a connection again.
A connection may not be established if Camera Connect is running when you
reconfigure connection settings. In this case, quit Camera Connect for a moment and
then restart it.

720
 Operation problems

Settings cannot be adjusted with the < > or < > dial.

Press the < > button to unlock the controls ( ).

Check the [ : Multi function lock] setting ( ).

Touch operation is not possible.

Make sure [ : Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive] ( ).

Check the [ : Multi function lock] setting ( ).

A camera button or dial does not work as expected.

Check these settings: [ : Switch / button], as well as [AF area selection

method] and [Custom Controls] in [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)] ( , ).
For movie recording, check the [Shutter btn function for movies] setting ( , ).

721
 Display problems

The menu screen shows fewer tabs and items.

Certain tabs and options do not appear in Basic Zone or for Live View shooting and
movie recording.

The display starts with [ ] My Menu, or the [ ] tab alone is displayed.

[Menu display] on the [ ] tab is set to [Display from My Menu tab] or [Display only
My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] ( ).

The file name's first character is an underscore (“_”).

Set [ : Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the first character will be an
underscore ( ).

The file name starts with “MVI_”.

It is a movie file ( ).

The file numbering does not start from 0001.

If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start from
0001 ( ).

The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.

Make sure the correct date and time are set ( ).

Check the time zone and daylight saving time ( ).

The date and time are not in the image.

The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and time are recorded
in the image data as shooting information. When printing, you can imprint the date and
time in the picture, using the date and time recorded in the shooting information ( ).

[###] is displayed.

If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the camera can
display, [###] will be displayed.

722
In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow.

In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may become slower due to the
AF point display device's (liquid crystal) characteristics. The display speed will return to
normal at room temperature.

The screen does not display a clear image.

If the screen is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.

The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or may look black in
high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.

723
 Playback problems

A red box is displayed on the image.

[ : AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] ( ).

During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.

The AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are played back:
• Images taken in < : > mode.
• Images taken in < : > mode.
• Images taken with Multi Shot Noise Reduction applied.
• Cropped images.

The image cannot be erased.

If the image is protected, it cannot be erased ( ).

Still photos and movies cannot be played back.

The camera may not be able to play back images taken with another camera.
Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.

Only few images can be played back.

The images have been filtered for playback with [ : Set image search conditions]
( ). Clear the image search conditions.

Mechanical sounds or sounds of camera operations can be heard

during movie playback.

The camera's built-in microphone will also record mechanical sounds of the lens or
sounds of camera/lens operations if AF operations are performed or the camera is
operated during movie recording. In this case, using an external microphone may
reduce these sounds. If the sounds are still distracting with an external microphone, it
may be more effective to remove the external microphone from the camera and position
it away from the camera and lens ( ).

724
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.

If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during autoexposure movie recording,
the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness stabilizes. In such a case, shoot
in the < > mode ( ).

No picture appears on the television.

Make sure [ : Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] correctly for the video
system of your television.
Make sure the HDMI cable's plug is inserted all the way in ( ).

There are multiple movie files for a single movie recording.

If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created automatically ( ).
However, if you use an SDXC card formatted with the camera, you can record a movie
in a single file even if it exceeds 4 GB.

My card reader does not recognize the card.

Depending on the card reader used and the computer's operating system, SDXC cards
may not be correctly recognized. In this case, either connect the camera to a computer
with an interface cable (sold separately) and use EOS Utility (EOS software, ) or
connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi ( ) to import the images on the camera.

The image cannot be resized.

With this camera, you cannot resize JPEG and RAW images ( ).

The image cannot be cropped.

With this camera, you cannot crop RAW images ( ).

Dots of light appear on the image.

White, red, or blue dots of light may appear in captured images if the sensor is affected
by cosmic rays or similar factors. Their appearance may be reduced by performing
[Clean now ] under [ : Sensor cleaning] ( ).

725
 Sensor cleaning problems

The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning.

Under [ : Sensor cleaning], when you select [Clean now ], the shutter will make a
mechanical sound during the cleaning, but no picture will be recorded to the card ( ).

Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.

If you repeatedly turn the power switch < > and < > within a short time
period, the < > icon may not be displayed ( ).

Computer connection problems

I cannot import images to a computer.

Install EOS Utility (EOS software) on the computer ( ).

If the camera is already connected via Wi-Fi, it cannot communicate with any computer
connected with an interface cable (sold separately).

Communication between the connected camera and computer does not

work.

When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [ : Time-lapse movie] to [Disable] ( ).

726
Error Codes

If there is a problem with the camera, an error message will appear. Follow the on-screen
instructions. If the problem persists, write down the error code (Err xx) and contact a Canon
Service Center.

(1) Error number

(2) Cause and countermeasures

727
System Map

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)

(16) (17)
(18)

(20) (19)
(33)
(21)

(22)

(23) (26) (34)

(24) (39)
(35)
(37)

(31) (32) (36)

(25) (27) (28) (38) (40)
(29) (30)

: Bundled accessories
(1) Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2
(2) Speedlite Transmitter ST-E3-RT
(3) Speedlite 270EX II
(4) Speedlite EL-100
(5) Speedlite 430EX III-RT/430EX III
(6) Speedlite 470EX-AI
(7) Speedlite 600EX II-RT
(8) Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX II
(9) Macro Twin Lite MT-26EX-RT
(10) Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1
(11) Stereo Microphone DM-E100
(12) GPS Receiver GP-E2*1
(13) Remote Switch RS-60E3
(14) Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
(15) Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3
(16) EF lenses
(17) EF-S lenses
(18) Semi Hard Case EH26-L/EH27-L
(19) Eyecup*2
(20) Eyepiece Extender EP-EX15 II

728
(21) Magnifier MG-Ef
(22) Rubber Frame Ef
(23) E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses
(24) Angle Finder C
(25) Hand Strap E2
(26) Strap
(27) Battery Pack LP-E17
(28) Battery Charger LC-E17
(29) AC Adapter AC-E6N*3
(30) DC Coupler DR-E18*3
(31) Protecting Cloth PC-E1/E2
(32) SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
(33) Remote Controller Adapter RA-E3*4
(34) HDMI Cable HTC-100 (approx. 2.9m/9.5 ft.)
(35) Interface Cable IFC-600PCU (approx. 1.0 m/3.3 ft.) *5
(36) Card reader
(37) USB port
(38) Card slot
(39) TV/monitor
(40) Computer

* 1: Images cannot be tagged with the shooting direction by this camera. Also note that connection via an interface cable is not
supported.
* 2: Eyecup Ef (sold separately) can also be used.
* 3: AC Adapter Kit ACK-E18 can also be used.
* 4: Compatible remote control: TC-80N3. Other remote controls cannot be used.
* 5: Camera end: USB Micro-B; computer end: USB Type-A.

729
ISO Speed in Movie Recording

In < > mode

The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100–12800.

To expand the maximum available ISO speed in the automatic setting range to H
(equivalent to ISO 25600; ), set [Max for Auto] in [ : ISO speed settings] to
[H(25600)] with [2: ISO expansion] in [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)] set to [1:Enable]
( ).

In < > mode

With ISO speed set to [ ], the speed is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–
12800.
To expand the maximum available ISO speed in the automatic setting range to H
(equivalent to ISO 25600; ) when ISO Auto is specified, set [Max for Auto] in [ :
ISO speed settings] to [H(25600)] with [2: ISO expansion] in [ : Custom
Functions(C.Fn)] set to [1:Enable] ( ).
ISO speed can be set manually in a range of ISO 100–12800. Note that you can expand
the maximum available speed in the manual setting range to H (equivalent to ISO
25600) by setting [Max for Auto] in [ : ISO speed settings] to [H(25600)] ( ).

Caution

[H(25600)] is not available when recording 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies.

730
Information Display

Quick Control Screen (in Viewfinder Shooting)

Live View Shooting Screen

Movie Recording Screen

Scene Icons

Playback Screen

731
 Quick Control Screen (in Viewfinder Shooting)

Each time you press the < > button, the information display will change.

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

When set to [ : Shooting screen: Guided]

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) (8)
(6)
(7) (9)
(1) Shooting mode*
(2) Shutter speed
(3) Aperture value
(4) ISO speed
(5) Exposure compensation
(6) Return
(7) Drive mode
(8) AF operation
(9) AF area selection mode
* These functions cannot be set with Quick Control.

732
When set to [ : Shooting screen: Standard]
(1) (11)
(2) (12)
(13)
(3) (14)
(4) (15)
(5) (16)
(6) (17)
(7) (18)
(8)
(9)
(10) (19)
(1) Shutter speed
(2) Shooting mode*
(3) Exposure compensation/AEB setting
(4) White balance
(5) Picture Style
(6) White balance correction
(7) AF operation
(8) AF area selection mode
(9) Return
(10) Metering mode
(11) Aperture value
(12) ISO speed
(13) Flash exposure compensation
(14) Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection
(15) White balance bracketing
(16) Custom Controls
(17) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(18) Image quality
(19) Drive mode
* These functions cannot be set with Quick Control.

733
 Live View Shooting Screen

Each time you press the < > button, the information display will change.

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

(1) (19) (20)

(2) (21)
(3) (22)
(4) (23)
(5) (24)
(6) (25)
(7) (26)
(8) (27)
(9) (28)
(10) (29)
(11) (30)
(12) (31)
(13) (32)
(14) (33)
(15) (34)
(16) (35)
(17) (36)
(18) (38) (37)

734
(1) Battery level
(2) Maximum burst
(3) Available shots/Sec. until self-timer shoots
(4) Shooting mode/Scene icon
(5) AF method
(6) AF operation
(7) Grid
(8) Drive mode
(9) Metering mode
(10) Image quality
(11) Wi-Fi function
(12) GPS acquisition status
(13) Multi-function lock
(14) AE lock
(15) Shutter speed/Multi-function lock warning
(16) Warning to use flash (blinking)/Flash ready (on)/FE lock/High-speed sync
(17) Aperture value
(18) AEB/FEB
(19) Electronic level
(20) AF point (1-point AF)
(21) Histogram
(22) Set AF point to center
(23) Quick Control button
(24) White balance/White balance correction
(25) Picture Style
(26) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(27) Wi-Fi signal strength
(28) Creative filters
(29) Still image aspect ratio
(30) Touch Shutter
(31) Bluetooth function
(32) Magnify button
(33) ISO speed
(34) Highlight tone priority
(35) Exposure simulation
(36) Exposure compensation
(37) Airplane mode
(38) Exposure level indicator

735
 Note

You can specify the information displayed in response to pressing the < >
button ( ).
The electronic level is not displayed when [AF method] is set to [ +Tracking] or
the camera is connected via HDMI to a television.
Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.

736
 Movie Recording Screen

Each time you press the < > button, the information display will change.

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

(1) (19) (20)

(2) (21)
(3) (22)
(4) (23)
(5) (24)
(6)
(25)
(7)
(8) (26)
(9) (27)
(10) (28)
(11) (29)
(12) (30)
(13) (31)
(14) (32)
(15) (33)
(16) (34)
(17) (35)
(18) (36) (37)

737
(1) Movie orientation information
(2) Battery level
(3) Movie recording time available/Elapsed recording time
(4) Movie recording mode
(5) Grid
(6) AF method
(7) Movie self-timer
(8) Movie recording size
(9) Digital zoom
(10) Movie digital IS
(11) Video snapshot
(12) Movie Servo AF
(13) Multi-function lock
(14) AE lock
(15) Shutter speed/Multi-function lock warning
(16) Audio recording level indicator (manual/line input)
(17) Aperture value
(18) Exposure compensation
(19) Temperature warning
(20) AF point (1-point AF)
(21) Histogram (for manual exposure)
(22) Set AF point to center
(23) Quick Control button
(24) Movie recording start button
(25) White balance/White balance correction
(26) Picture Style
(27) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(28) Creative filters
(29) Bluetooth function
(30) Magnify button
(31) Wi-Fi signal strength
(32) ISO speed
(33) Highlight tone priority
(34) Airplane mode
(35) Wi-Fi function
(36) GPS acquisition status
(37) Electronic level

738
 Warning

You can specify the information displayed in response to pressing the < >
button ( ).
The electronic level is not displayed when [AF method] is set to [ +Tracking] or
the camera is connected via HDMI to a television.
The electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during movie
recording. (The display will disappear when you start recording a movie.)
When movie recording starts, the movie recording remaining time will change to the
elapsed time.

Note

Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.

739
 Scene Icons

In < > shooting mode, the camera detects the type of scene and sets all settings
accordingly. The detected scene type is indicated on the upper left of the screen.

Subject Portrait Non-Portrait

Nature/ Background
In In Color
Background Outdoor Close*2
Motion*1 Motion*1
Scene
Bright
Gray
Backlit

Blue Sky Included

Light blue
Backlit

Sunset *3 *3 Orange

Spotlight

Dark Dark blue

With Tripod*1 *4*5 *3 *4*5 *3

* 1: Not displayed during movie recording.

* 2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension tube or close-up
lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
* 3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.

Warning

For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the
actual scene.

* 4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:

The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.
* 5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II
• EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
• EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.
* 4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.

740
 Playback Screen

Basic information display for still photos

(1)
(2) (9)
(3) (10)
(4) (11)
(5)

(6) (12)
(7) (13)
(8) (14)
(1) Bluetooth function
(2) Wi-Fi function
(3) Airplane mode
(4) Current image no./Total images/No. of images found
(5) Battery level
(6) Shutter speed
(7) Aperture value
(8) Exposure compensation amount
(9) Rating
(10) Image protection
(11) Folder no.-File no.
(12) Image quality/Edited image/Cropping
(13) Highlight tone priority
(14) ISO speed

741
 Warning

If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may not be
displayed.
It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on other
cameras.

Detailed information display for still photos

(1) (8)

(9)

(2) (10)

(11)
(3) (12)
(13)
(4) (14)
(15)
(5)
(6) (16)
(7) (17)

742
(1) Aperture value
(2) Shutter speed
(3) Shooting mode
(4) White balance
(5) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(6) White balance correction amount
(7) Picture Style/Settings
(8) Exposure compensation amount
(9) Shooting date and time
(10) Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
(11) ISO speed
(12) Highlight tone priority
(13) Scroll bar
(14) Metering mode
(15) Flash exposure compensation amount/Bounce/Multi Shot Noise Reduction
(16) File size
(17) Image quality/Edited image/Cropping
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be displayed.
* Lines indicating the image area will be displayed for images taken with the aspect ratio set ( ) and with RAW or RAW+JPEG
set for image quality.
* For images with added cropping information, lines are shown to indicate the image area.
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, [ ] will be displayed.
*[ ] indicates images shot with bounce flash photography.
*[ ] indicates Creative filter shots, or images created and saved by performing RAW image processing, resizing, cropping, or
frame-grabbing.
*[ ] indicates images cropped and then saved.

743
Detailed information display for movies

(1)

(2)
(6)

(3) (7)
(4) (8)
(5) (9)
(1) Movie playback
(2) Movie recording mode/Time-lapse movie/Video snapshot
(3) Movie orientation information
(4) Image size
(5) Frame rate
(6) Movie digital IS
(7) Recording time
(8) Movie recording format
(9) Movie compression method
* For simplicity, explanations are omitted for items that are also included in basic/detailed information display for still photos,
which are not shown here.

Note

During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and [Threshold] of
[Picture Style]'s [Sharpness].

744
AF Sensor

The camera's AF sensor has 45 AF points. AF sensor patterns formed by the AF points are
as follows. High-precision AF centered in the viewfinder is possible using lenses with a
maximum aperture up to f/2.8.

Warning

The number of available AF points, the focusing patterns, and the Area AF frame
shape vary by lens. For details, refer to Compatible Lenses and Autofocusing
(Viewfinder Shooting).

Schematic diagram
(1)

(2)

(1) Cross-type focusing: f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal

(some also supporting f/8)
(2) Dual cross-type focusing: f/2.8 right diagonal + f/2.8 left diagona
f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal (also supporting f/8)

This focusing sensor is geared to obtain higher-precision

focusing for lenses with a maximum aperture value as low as
f/2.8. A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus on the
subjects that may be difficult to focus. It is provided at the
center AF point.
These focusing sensors are geared for lenses with a maximum
aperture value as low as f/5.6 (and some supporting f/8). Since
they have a horizontal pattern, they can detect vertical lines.
They cover all 45 AF points.
These focusing sensors are geared for lenses with a maximum
aperture value as low as f/5.6 (and some supporting f/8). Since
they have a vertical pattern, they can detect horizontal lines.
They cover all 45 AF points.

745
Compatible Lenses and Autofocusing (Viewfinder
Shooting)

Group A

Group B

Group C

Group D

Group E

Group F

Group G

Group H

Group Classification of Lenses

Warning

Although the camera has 45 AF points, lenses are classified into 8 groups (A–H)
which vary in the number of AF points available, AF point patterns, Area AF
frame shapes, and other details.
Using a lens in Groups E to H will have fewer usable AF points.
Lens groups are listed in Group Classification of Lenses. Check which group
your lens belongs to.
The number of AF points varies depending on your specified Still Image Aspect
Ratio.

746
 Note

AF points in positions indicated by [ ] blink when the < > or < > button is
pressed (while [ / ] points remain lit). For details on AF point blinking/
illumination, see Meaning of Lit or Blinking AF Points.
For updates on “Group Classification of Lenses,” visit the Canon website or others.
Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.

Group A

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are available.

: Dual cross-type AF point. Offers superior subject tracking and higher focusing precision
than other AF points.
: Cross-type AF point. Offers excellent subject tracking and high-precision focusing.

747
 Group B

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are available.

: Cross-type AF point. Offers excellent subject tracking and high-precision focusing.

Group C

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are available.

: Cross-type AF point. Offers excellent subject tracking and high-precision focusing.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.

748
 Group D

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are available.

: Cross-type AF point. Offers excellent subject tracking and high-precision focusing.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.

Group E

Autofocusing with 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF points.) All the AF area
selection modes are available. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking
the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point Automatic selection AF.

: Cross-type AF point. Offers excellent subject tracking and high-precision focusing.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

749
 Group F

Autofocusing with 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF points.) All the AF area
selection modes are available. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking
the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point Automatic selection AF.

: Cross-type AF point. Offers excellent subject tracking and high-precision focusing.

: AF points sensitive to vertical lines (AF points in the horizontal array at the top and
bottom) or horizontal lines (AF points in a vertical array on the left and right).
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

750
 Group G

Autofocusing with 27 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF points.) Large Zone AF
(manual selection of zone) cannot be selected in AF area selection mode. During automatic
AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different
from 45-point Automatic selection AF.

: Cross-type AF point. Offers excellent subject tracking and high-precision focusing.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Group H

Autofocusing is possible only with the center AF point.

: Cross-type AF point. Offers excellent subject tracking and high-precision focusing.

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Caution

If the maximum aperture value is slower than f/5.6 (greater than f/5.6 but not
exceeding f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting low-contrast or
low-light subjects.
If the maximum aperture value is slower than f/8 (greater than f/8), AF is not
possible during viewfinder shooting.

751
 Group Classification of Lenses

EF-S24mm f/2.8 STM A

EF-S35mm f/2.8 Macro IS STM B

EF-S60mm f/2.8 Macro USM B

EF-S10-18mm f/4.5-5.6 IS STM D

EF-S10-22mm f/3.5-4.5 USM B

EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM B

EF-S17-55mm f/2.8 IS USM A

EF-S17-85mm f/4-5.6 IS USM B

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 C

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 USM C

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II C

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM C

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 III B

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS C

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II B

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM B

EF-S18-55mm f/4-5.6 IS STM D

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS B

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM B

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM B

EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS B

EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS B

EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II B

EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM B

EF14mm f/2.8L USM A

EF14mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye A

EF20mm f/2.8 USM A

EF24mm f/1.4L USM A

752
EF24mm f/1.4L II USM A

EF24mm f/2.8 A

EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM A

EF28mm f/1.8 USM A

EF28mm f/2.8 A

EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM A

EF35mm f/1.4L USM A

EF35mm f/1.4L II USM A

EF35mm f/2 A

EF35mm f/2 IS USM A

EF40mm f/2.8 STM A

EF50mm f/1.0L USM A

EF50mm f/1.2L USM A

EF50mm f/1.4 USM A

EF50mm f/1.8 A

EF50mm f/1.8 II A

EF50mm f/1.8 STM A

EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro B

EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro + LIFE SIZE Converter B

EF85mm f/1.2L USM A

EF85mm f/1.2L II USM A

EF85mm f/1.4L IS USM A

EF85mm f/1.8 USM A

EF100mm f/2 USM A

EF100mm f/2.8 Macro B

EF100mm f/2.8 Macro USM E

EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM B

EF135mm f/2L USM A

EF135mm f/2L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A

EF135mm f/2L USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus) A

EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM B

EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F

753
EF200mm f/1.8L USM A

EF200mm f/1.8L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A*

EF200mm f/1.8L USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B*

EF200mm f/2L IS USM A

EF200mm f/2L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A

EF200mm f/2L IS USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L USM A

EF200mm f/2.8L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF200mm f/2.8L II USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L II USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L USM A

EF300mm f/2.8L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B*

EF300mm f/2.8L USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B*

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM A

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM A

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/4L USM B

EF300mm f/4L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/4L USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF300mm f/4L IS USM B

EF300mm f/4L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/4L IS USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF400mm f/2.8L USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B*

EF400mm f/2.8L USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B*

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B*

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B*

754
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS III USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF1.4x B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF1.4x II B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF1.4x III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF2x B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF2x II B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF2x III B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF400mm f/5.6L USM B

EF400mm f/5.6L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF500mm f/4L IS USM B

EF500mm f/4L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF500mm f/4L IS USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM B

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF500mm f/4.5L USM B

EF500mm f/4.5L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)*

EF600mm f/4L USM B

EF600mm f/4L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B*

EF600mm f/4L USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)*

EF600mm f/4L IS USM B

755
EF600mm f/4L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF600mm f/4L IS USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF600mm f/4L IS II USM B

EF600mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF600mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF600mm f/4L IS III USM B

EF600mm f/4L IS III USM + Extender EF1.4x B

EF600mm f/4L IS III USM + Extender EF1.4x II B

EF600mm f/4L IS III USM + Extender EF1.4x III B

EF600mm f/4L IS III USM + Extender EF2x H

EF600mm f/4L IS III USM + Extender EF2x II H

EF600mm f/4L IS III USM + Extender EF2x III H

EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM E

EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF1200mm f/5.6L USM E

EF1200mm f/5.6L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)*

EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM B

EF11-24mm f/4L USM C

EF16-35mm f/2.8L USM A

EF16-35mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF16-35mm f/2.8L III USM A

EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM B

EF17-35mm f/2.8L USM A

EF17-40mm f/4L USM B

EF20-35mm f/2.8L A

EF20-35mm f/3.5-4.5 USM C

EF22-55mm f/4-5.6 USM F

EF24-70mm f/2.8L USM A

EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM B

EF24-85mm f/3.5-4.5 USM D

EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM B

EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM B

756
EF24-105mm f/4L IS II USM B

EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM A

EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 E

EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II E

EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM B

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 III USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 IV USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 V USM E

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 USM B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II USM B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 III B

EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 USM B

EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 II USM B

EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 F

EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 USM F

EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM B

EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 B

EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 USM B

EF28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS USM B

EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5 E

EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5A E

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 F

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 PZ E

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM F

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II E

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III F

EF35-105mm f/3.5-4.5 B

757
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 H

EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM H

EF35-135mm f/3.5-4.5 B

EF35-135mm f/4-5.6 USM C

EF35-350mm f/3.5-5.6L USM D

EF38-76mm f/4.5-5.6 E

EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5 B

EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5L B

EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM D

EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM D

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM A

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B**

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B**

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM A

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM A

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS III USM A

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF1.4x B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF1.4x II B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF1.4x III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF2x B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF2x II B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS III USM + Extender EF2x III B

EF70-200mm f/4L USM B

EF70-200mm f/4L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/4L USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM B

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF70-200mm f/4L IS II USM B

758
EF70-200mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF1.4x B

EF70-200mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF1.4x II B

EF70-200mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF1.4x III B

EF70-200mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF2x H

EF70-200mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF2x II H

EF70-200mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF2x III H

EF70-210mm f/3.5-4.5 USM B

EF70-210mm f/4 B

EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM B

EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM B

EF70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM B

EF70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 USM C

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II USM B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM B

EF80-200mm f/2.8L A

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 D

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM E

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II E

EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 D

EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM D

EF100-200mm f/4.5A B

EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM C

EF100-300mm f/5.6 B

EF100-300mm f/5.6L B

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM B

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM B

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II H (f/8)

759
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM + Extender EF1.4x III G (f/8)

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender 1.4x B

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender 1.4x: Built-in Ext. 1.4x B

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender 1.4x + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender 1.4x: Built-in Ext. 1.4x + Extender EF1.4x
H (f/8)
I/II/III
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender 1.4x + Extender EF2x I/II H (f/8)

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender 1.4x + Extender EF2x III G (f/8)

TS-E17mm f/4L B

TS-E24mm f/3.5L B

TS-E24mm f/3.5L II B

TS-E45mm f/2.8 A

TS-E50mm f/2.8L Macro B

TS-E90mm f/2.8 A

TS-E90mm f/2.8L Macro B

TS-E135mm f/4L Macro B

Caution

If Extender EF2x (I/II/III) is attached to the EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM lens, AF is
not possible.
Precise autofocusing may not be achieved if you use a lens and Extender EF1.4x
III/EF2x III combination marked with an asterisk or a lens and extender in a
combination marked with two asterisks. In this case, refer to the Instruction Manual
of the lens or extender used.

Note

If you use a TS-E lens, manual focusing is required. TS-E lens group designations
apply only when tilt or shift is not used.

760
Specifications

Type

Type: Digital AF/AE single-lens reflex camera

Lens mount: Canon EF mount
Compatible lenses: Lenses in Canon EF product group (including EF-S lenses, excluding
EF-M lenses)
Lens focal length: Approx. 1.6 times the focal length indicated on the lens

Image sensor

Type: CMOS sensor

Screen size Approx. 22.3 × 14.9 mm

Effective pixels* Approx. 24.1 megapixels

Dual Pixel CMOS AF Supported

* Rounded to the nearest 100,000.

Recording system

Image recording format: Compliant to Design rule for Camera File system 2.0 and
Exif 2.31*
* Supports time difference information

Image type and extension

Image type Extension

JPEG JPG

Stills RAW
CR3
C-RAW

761
Still photo recording

Image type in still photo recording

Image quality Resolution (Pixels)

/ 24 megapixels (6000 × 4000)

/ Approx. 10.6 megapixels (3984 × 2656)

JPEG
/ Approx. 5.9 megapixels (2976 × 1984)

Approx. 3.8 megapixels (2400 × 1600)

RAW / 24 megapixels (6000 × 4000)

Still photo pixel count

Pixel count

Image quality Aspect ratio

3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1

Approx. 21.3 Approx. 20.2

24 megapixels 16 megapixels
/ megapixels* megapixels*
(6000 × 4000) (4000 × 4000)
(5328 × 4000) (6000 × 3368)
Approx. 10.6 Approx. 9.5 Approx. 8.9 Approx. 7.1
/ megapixels megapixels megapixels* megapixels
(3984 × 2656) (3552 × 2664) (3984 × 2240) (2656 × 2656)
Approx. 5.9 Approx. 5.3 Approx. 5.0 Approx. 3.9
/ megapixels megapixels megapixels* megapixels
(2976 × 1984) (2656 × 1992) (2976 × 1680) (1984 × 1984)
Approx. 3.8 Approx. 3.4 Approx. 3.2 Approx. 2.6
megapixels megapixels* megapixels* megapixels
(2400 × 1600) (2112 × 1600) (2400 × 1344) (1600 × 1600)
24 megapixels
/ (6000 × 4000)

* Values for Recording Pixels are rounded off to the nearest 100,000th.
* JPEG images are generated in the set aspect ratio.
* RAW/C-RAW images are generated in [3:2], and the set aspect ratio is appended.
* Aspect ratios are slightly different than indicated for image sizes marked with an asterisk.
* These aspect ratios (M, S1, and S2) and pixel counts also apply to resizing.

762
Still photo file size / Number of possible shots / Maximum burst for continuous
shooting

File size Possible shots Maximum burst

Image quality
(Approx. MB) (Approx.)*1 (Approx.)*1

8.4 3600 170

4.5 6610 170

4.6 6480 167

2.6 11400 167

3.1 9690 163

1.8 16010 163

1.8 16340 164

27.2 1120 40

15.8 1930 75

+ 35.6 850 35

+ 24.2 1250 57

* 1: Number of shots available and standard maximum burst in viewfinder shooting with a 32 GB UHS-I card
conforming to Canon testing standards.
* File size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst vary depending on shooting conditions (including
subject, memory card brand, ISO speed, Picture Style, and Custom Function).

763
Movie recording

Movie recording format: MP4

Estimated recording time, movie bit rate, and file size

Total recording time (approx.)

Movie bit rate
Movie recording size
File size
8 GB 32 GB 128 GB

23.98 fps IPB Approx. 120 Mbps

4K UHD 8 min. 35 min. 2 hr. 21 min.
25.00 fps (Standard) Approx. 861 MB/min.
59.94 fps IPB Approx. 60 Mbps
17 min. 1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 43 min.
50.00 fps (Standard) Approx. 432 MB/min.
29.97 fps
IPB Approx. 30 Mbps
Full HD 23.98 fps 35 min. 2 hr. 20 min. 9 hr. 23 min.
(Standard) Approx. 217 MB/min.
25.00 fps
29.97 fps 23 hr. Approx. 12 Mbps
IPB (Light) 1 hr. 26 min. 5 hr. 47 min.
25.00 fps 11 min. Approx. 88 MB/min.
59.94 fps IPB 10 hr. Approx. 26 Mbps
HD 40 min. 2 hr. 42 min.
50.00 fps (Standard) 49 min. Approx. 188 MB/min.

Movie recording notes

* Bit rate indicates video output only, audio is not included.
* File size and time indicates video output + audio
* With [ : Movie digital IS] set to [Disable].
* Movie recording stops automatically when the recording time reaches 29:59.

Card performance requirements

Card performance
Movie recording size
requirements
UHS-I/UHS Speed Class 3
4K UHD 23.98 fps / 25.00 fps IPB (Standard)
or higher
SD Speed Class 10 or
59.94 fps / 50.00 fps IPB (Standard)
higher

Full HD 29.97 fps / 23.98 fps

IPB (Standard) SD Speed Class 6 or higher
/ 25.00 fps

29.97 fps / 25.00 fps IPB (Light) SD Speed Class 4 or higher

HD 59.94 fps / 50.00 fps IPB (Standard) SD Speed Class 4 or higher

Read speed of 40 MB/s or

4K UHD Time-lapse movie 29.97 fps / 25.00 fps ALL-I
higher
Read speed of 20 MB/s or
Full HD Time-lapse movies 29.97 fps / 25.00 fps ALL-I
higher

* With [ : Movie digital IS] set to [Disable].

764
Recording microphone
Built-in microphone: Stereo microphones
External microphone terminal: 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini jack

Recording media

Recording media: SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards

SD speed class Supported

UHS speed class Supported

Supported
UHS-I
* Supports high-speed writing

Viewfinder

Type: Eye-level SLR type, with pentamirror

Focusing screen: Fixed
Coverage: Vertical/horizontal: Approx. 95%
* Eyepoint: Approx. 19 mm
* Lens: EF50mm f/1.8 STM
Magnification / angle of view: Approx. 0.82x / Approx. 23.2°
* Lens: EF50mm f/1.8 STM at infinity
* Diopter: –1 m–1
Dioptric adjustment range: Approx. –3.0 – +1.0 m–1 (dpt)
Eyepoint: Approx. 19 mm (at –1 m–1 from eyepiece lens end)

Screen

Type: TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor

Screen size: Approx. 7.5 cm (3.0 in.) (3:2)
Dot count: Approx. 1,040,000 dots
Angle of view: Approx. 170° vertically and horizontally
Brightness adjustment: Adjustable to one of seven brightness levels
Touch-screen panel detection system: Capacitive sensing

HDMI

HDMI video/audio output: HDMI mini OUT terminal (Type C), CEC not compatible
HDMI resolution: Auto / 1080p

765
Autofocus in optical viewfinder shooting (still photo)

Focusing method: TTL secondary image-forming phase-difference detection using

AF-dedicated sensor

Focusing operation

One-Shot AF

AI Focus AF
Autofocus
* Automatic switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo AF

AI Servo AF

Manual focus Supported

Autofocus in Live View shooting (still photo) and movie shooting

Item Live View shooting (still photo) Movie recording

• Dual Pixel CMOS AF

Focus detection method Dual Pixel CMOS AF • Contrast detection*

* For 4K UHD movies/4K UHD time-lapse

movies

Approx. 88% (horizontal) × 100% Approx. 88% (horizontal) × 100%

(vertical) (vertical)
AF area Approx. 80% (horizontal) × 80% Approx. 80% (horizontal) × 95%
(vertical) (vertical)
* Varies depending on the lens used * Varies depending on the lens used

Number of AF area available for

Max. 143 zones Max. 117 zones
automatic selection

Selectable positions for AF point Max. 3975 positions Max. 3375 positions

Eye Detection AF Supported Supported

EV –2 – 18 (center AF point)
EV –4 – 18 (center AF point)
* At 23°C/73°F, f/1.2, ISO 100, One-Shot
Focusing brightness range * At 23°C/73°F, f/1.2, ISO 100, One-Shot
AF
AF
* At 23.98 fps

766
Exposure control

Metering functions under various shooting conditions

Still photo shooting

Item Movie recording
Optical viewfinder Live View

216-zone (18 × 12)

metering using
approx. 220,000 pixel 384-zone (24 × 16) metering using image sensor
Metering mode
RGB+IR metering output signals
sensor TTL full-aperture
metering
Supported
Evaluative metering Supported * When faces are detected
with [ +Tracking]

Supported: Approx. 6.5% Supported: Approx. 5.8%

Partial metering –
of the screen of the screen
Supported: Approx. 2.0% Supported: Approx. 2.9%
Spot metering –
of the screen of the screen
Supported
Center-weighted average metering Supported * When no faces are
detected

Metering brightness range

EV 1 – 20 EV –2 – 20 EV 0 – 20
* At 23°C/73°F, ISO 100

Exposure control under various shooting conditions (Creative Zone)

Item Still photo shooting Movie recording

Shutter speed 1/4000 – 30 sec., Bulb 1/4000 – 1/8 sec.

• 4K UHD: ISO 100*1 – 6400

ISO speed (Recommended ISO 100*1 – 25600*2 (in 1/3-stop increments)
exposure index) (in 1/3-stop increments) • Full HD / HD: ISO 100 – 12800*3
(in 1/3-stop increments)

• Without flash firing: ISO 100*1 –

25600*4 • 4K UHD: ISO 100*1 – 6400
ISO Auto (Recommended exposure
index) • Flash firing: ISO 100*1 – 1600*4*5 • Full HD / HD: ISO 100*1 –
12800*3*4*6
• Bulb exposure: ISO 400

ISO 400 – 25600 (in 1-stop ISO 6400 – 12800*3 (in 1-stop
Max. for ISO Auto
increments) increments)

* 1: ISO 200 with [ : Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] or [Enhanced].

* 2: H (equivalent to ISO 51200) with [2: ISO expansion] in [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)] set to
[1:Enable].
* 3: H (equivalent to ISO 25600) with [2: ISO expansion] in [ : Custom Functions(C.Fn)] set to
[1:Enable].
* 4: Varies depending on [Max for Auto] setting.
* 5: Maximum limit may be lower depending on the ISO speed set by variable control of maximum ISO Auto
limit for E-TTL.
* 6: ISO 6400 when Digital zoom is set.

767
Built-in flash

Type: Retractable flash in the pentamirror housing

Retraction method: Manual
Guide number: G. No.: Approx. 12 (ISO 100, m) / 39.4 (ISO 100, feet)

External flash

Sync contacts: Hot shoe: X-sync contact

* Maximum flash sync speed: 1/200 sec.
Flash mode: E-TTL II metering

Drive

Drive mode and continuous shooting speed

Drive mode Viewfinder shooting Live View shooting

Single shooting Yes

High-speed continuous*1 Max. approx. 7.0 shots/sec. Max. approx. 7.5 shots/sec.

Low-speed continuous Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec. Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.

Self-timer:10 sec / remote control*2 Yes (BR-E1: Supported / RC-6: Not supported)

Self-timer:2 sec / remote control*2 Yes (BR-E1: Supported)

Self-timer:Continuous Yes (2 – 10 shots)

* 1: 1/1000 sec. or faster shutter speed, EF50mm f/1.8 STM lens, open aperture, with a fully charged
Battery Pack LP-E17, and at room temperature (23°C/73°F)
* 2: Remote control icon [ ] displayed only when paired with BR-E1

768
Playback
Item Stills Movies

1.5x – 10x
Magnify zoom display –
* Can be activated by double-tapping

AF point display Supported –

Supported
Highlight alert
* Detailed information display only

OFF / ★ to ★★★★★
Rating
Select images / Select range / All images in folder / All images on card

Image search Search conditions: Rating / Date / Folder / Protect / Type of file

Select images / Select range / All images in folder / Unprotect all images in
Protect
folder / All images on card / Unprotect all images on card

In-camera RAW processing Supported –

Resize Supported –

Cropping Supported –

Print ordering (DPOF)

System: Compliant with DPOF Version 1.1

Customization (C.Fn)

Custom Function: 14 Custom Functions can be configured.

External interface

Digital terminal

Terminal type Micro-B

Transmission Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0)

Applications For PC communication

HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (Resolution switches automatically)

External microphone input terminal: Compatible with the 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini
plug
Remote control terminal: Remote Switch RS-60E3 type terminal supported

769
Power source

Battery: Battery Pack LP-E17 × 1

AC power source

AC adapter AC-E6N

DC coupler DR-E18

Possible shots

Shooting conditions
Shooting method Temperature
AE: 50% / FA: 50%
AE: 100%
* CIPA testing standards

+23°C / 73°F Approx. 1240 shots Approx. 800 shots

Viewfinder shooting
0°C / 32°F Approx. 1120 shots Approx. 730 shots

+23°C / 73°F Approx. 360 shots Approx. 310 shots

Live View shooting
0°C / 32°F Approx. 330 shots Approx. 290 shots

* With a fully charged LP-E17

Time available for movie recording

Conditions of use Temperature Available operating time

4K UHD, 23.98 fps, IPB (Standard) +23°C / 73°F Approx. 1 hr. 45 min.

Time available for

+23°C / 73°F Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.
movie recording
Full HD, 29.97 fps, IPB (Standard)
0°C / 32°F Approx. 2 hr. 20 min.

Time available for Screen on +23°C / 73°F Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.

Full HD
Time-lapse movie
Interval: 5 sec.
recording Screen off +23°C / 73°F Approx. 2 hr. 50 min.

* With a fully charged LP-E17

Battery information

Remaining capacity 4-level indicator

Recharge performance 3-level indicator

770
Wi-Fi

Standards compliance

Wi-Fi standards Transmission method

IEEE802.11b DS-SS modulation

IEEE802.11g
OFDM modulation
IEEE802.11n

Transmission frequency (Center frequency)

Frequency 2412 – 2462 MHz

Channels 1 – 11 channels

Connection, authentication, and data encryption methods

Connection method Authentication Encryption

WPA2-PSK AES
Camera access point
Open Disable

WEP
Open
Disable

Infrastructure Shared key WEP

WPA-PSK
TKIP
AES
WPA2-PSK

Bluetooth

Standards compliance: Bluetooth Specification Version 4.1 compliant (Bluetooth Low

Energy Technology)
Transmission method: GFSK modulation

771
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W×H×D) Approx. 131.0 × 102.6 × 76.2 mm / 5.16 × 4.04 × 3.00 in.

Approx. 515 g / 18.17 oz. (including battery pack and card)/Approx. 471 g /
Weight
16.61 oz. (body only)

Operating environment
Working temperature range 0 – 40°C (32 – 104°F)

Working humidity 85% or less

All data above is based on Canon testing standards and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association)
testing standards and guidelines.
Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).
Product specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, contact the respective lens manufacturer.

772
Trademarks and Licensing

Trademarks

About MPEG-4 Licensing

Accessories

Trademarks

Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
App Store and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google LLC.
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and
is used under license.
QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo and the Wi-Fi Protected Setup mark are trademarks of the
Wi-Fi Alliance.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

773
 About MPEG-4 Licensing

“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for
encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was
encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT
RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC
STANDARD (''AVC VIDEO'') AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY
A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED
OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

* Notice displayed in English as required.

774
 Accessories

Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended

This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with genuine Canon
accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine accessories is highly recommended.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as
malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a
leakage and/or explosion of a battery). Please note that repairs arising out of the malfunction
of non-genuine accessories will not be covered by the warranty for repairs, although you
may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.

Caution

Battery Pack LP-E17 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an

incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents for
which Canon cannot be held liable.

775